JP2021178030A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high.SOLUTION: A game machine includes adjustment means for adjusting so that the imparting speed decreases in a unit period when it is determined that the game state is a high imparting state when the number of advantageous states that has occurred in the consecutive winning state period reaches a specific number of times, and performance control means capable of controlling the performance on the basis of the control information transmitted from the game control means. The performance control means can execute the performance control based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a group notice performance, by designing a second display period in which characters appear and the performance progresses longer than a first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display, a suitable group notice performance can be provided. In addition, in the group notice performance, it does not cause a question as to whether the performance is the group notice performance or a misunderstanding that only one person will appear, since there is no situation where only one person is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-28

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can be controlled to a normal state and a special state that is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the normal state.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that is controlled over a predetermined number of variable display times in a high probability state (probability change state), which is a special state that is easily controlled by a jackpot state that is more advantageous than a normal state (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-8350

However, in Patent Document 1, a large amount of advantageous states (big hit states) controlled to the high probability state (probability change state) are repeatedly generated by the end of the high probability state (probability change state). There is a problem that a game ball, which is a game medium, may be given in a short period of time, and there is a fear that the player's gambling spirit may be excessively agitated.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing an excessive gaming value from being imparted in a short period of time and an excessive increase in gambling. The purpose.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high accuracy and high base state)) that is more likely to be controlled to the normal state and the advantageous state than the normal state. A gaming machine that can be controlled to (low accuracy and high base state)) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, an update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13).
As shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, the adjusting means (for example, FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21) is adjusted so that the speed of giving the game value given in the unit period decreases when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the ball ejection state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball ejection state determination process to prolong the fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during the big hit game).
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 A part for executing the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the payout state specification command in the process of SGS17).
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
The adjusting means is a variable display in which the variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust so that it is longer than the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2" (first high ball ejection state or second). The part where the special figure variable display time in each fluctuation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (when the ball ejection state is low). ),
Moreover,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. It is characterized in that a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 95).
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment for lowering the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an excessive amount is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given and the gambling to be excessively increased, and it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game interest can be improved. .. Further, it is possible to more preferably execute the group production.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the following gaming machine (A). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect using an movable movable body as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-92949, and by moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display, a structure is formed. There was something that made it possible to perform an effect similar to the effect of moving a movable body. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the pseudo-movable body is only moved and displayed in the same manner as the movable body, and the interest of the production cannot be enhanced. In view of this point, the pseudo-movable body is used. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines that can enhance the appeal of display.

The gaming machine according to the means (A) is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It ’s a gaming machine 1),
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. It is characterized in that a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 95).
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect.

It should be noted that the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect, and the determination ratio of a display pattern. It is a figure which shows the update example of the 1st hold storage display area and the 2nd hold storage display area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing of the variable display control timer and the movable body control timer. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach α1 deviation and the super reach α2 deviation. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach β1 jackpot and super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 deviation and the super reach β2 deviation. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of a movable body suggestion motion, and an image enlargement ratio in each enlarged display period. (A) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion suggestion effect, and (B) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion effect. It is a figure which shows the effect mode up to the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine of the feature part 162SG. (A), (B), and (C) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the variable display time of each fluctuation pattern, and a ball ejection state flag. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing in the pachinko game machine of the feature part 162SG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for game control in the pachinko game machine of the feature part 162SG. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a ball ejection state determination process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a ball ejection state flag value and each adjustment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the progress state of a big hit and the opening and closing state of a big prize opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the payout state flag value and each period in a big hit state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the hold storage of the jackpot (excluding the probability variation jackpot C), and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the hold storage of the outlier. Is. (A) is a diagram showing a first reserved storage display area and a second reserved storage display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an update example of the first reserved storage display area and the second reserved storage display area. .. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the notice production type determination table A to C. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss which is selected according to the value of the ball ejection state flag. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is the figure which looked into between the game board and an image display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of a screen in an image display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating various boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit type. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an effect control command. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the prevariation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the post-variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the prevariation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table in each notice production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a group notice work process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the 6-person group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the auxiliary display used in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the motion blur processing used in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of the contour when characters overlap in a group notice effect. It is the figure which looked into between the game board and an image display device during execution of a group notice production. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of volume and the luminance data table in a group notice effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the 6-person group notice in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of all lighting. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of a PUSH effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a group notice luminance data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group notice luminance data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for clarifying the production mode of the comparative example when the 6-person group notice is executed in the stage A. It is a figure explaining the effect mode when the background notice is executed in the stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when a lamp notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. 3 is for explaining the production mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in the stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the details of a boingo group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode of the comparative example when the boingo group notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode of the comparative example when the boingo group notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the 6-person group notice and the dog group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[form]
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high accuracy and high base state)) that is more likely to be controlled to the normal state and the advantageous state than the normal state. A gaming machine that can be controlled to (low accuracy and high base state)) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, the update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13) and the predetermined numerical data are the second values. Occasionally, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, the CPU 103 ejects balls in the ball ejection state determination process. By setting the state flag value to "1" or "2", the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period during the jackpot game are extended).
The updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when the end condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the CPU 103 sets a ball ejection state flag. When the ball is set to "1", the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment is set to 0),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, adjustments are made to reduce the speed of adding the game value, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an excessive amount is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being added and the gambling property from being excessively increased.

The gaming machine of the second aspect of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a big hit).
The adjusting means is a variable display in which the variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust so that it is longer than the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2" (first high ball ejection state or second). The part where the special figure variable display time in each fluctuation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (when the ball ejection state is low). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the time interval of the advantageous state generated when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be lengthened by increasing the variable display period, the time interval of the advantageous state when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be lengthened. It is possible to reduce the game value granting speed without reducing the game value granted in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the third form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
The advantageous state is the grantable period during which the game value can be granted (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, the period of each round game in which the large winning opening is open) and the grant that the game value cannot be granted. Includes the impossible period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period in which the large winning opening is closed).
The adjusting means controls the period during which the advantageous state cannot be granted, which is controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-21, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", the value of the ball ejection status flag is adjusted to be longer than the non-grantable period. The part where the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending period are set longer during the jackpot game than when it is "0"),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value by lengthening the period during which the game value cannot be given.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third embodiments.
Whether the advantageous state is a first advantageous state (for example, probabilistic jackpot B) or a second advantageous state (for example, probabilistic jackpot A) in which the magnitude of the game value given is larger than that of the first advantageous state. (For example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a process of determining a jackpot type (step 162SGS154) in the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 11-16).
In the adjusting means, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the ratio at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means is the ratio at which the predetermined numerical data is the first value. At times, the first advantageous state is adjusted to be higher than the ratio at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means (for example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-1, the ball ejection state is a high ball ejection state. In this case, the determination rate of the probability variation jackpot A is lowered and the determination rate of the probability variation jackpot B is increased as the jackpot type compared to the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is easy to determine the first advantageous state in which the magnitude of the game value given is small, so that the predetermined numerical data is the second value. Since the magnitude of the game value given at the time can be reduced, as a result, the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments.
In the adjusting means, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the ratio at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determining means is the first value. Is adjusted so as to be higher than the rate at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determining means (for example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-2, the big hit is higher than the low ball output state in the high ball output state. The part that increases the rate of determining the type as a non-probability change jackpot, and the part that increases the rate of winning the fall lottery in the high ball output state rather than the low ball output state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the end of the advantageous period is easily determined and controlled to the normal state, so that a continuous advantageous state is generated through the special state. Since the number of times can be reduced, as a result, it is possible to reduce the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the form 6 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 5.
The end condition is that the number of occurrences of the advantageous state that occurred in the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data was updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reached the end determination number. (For example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-3, the first high output is performed on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high output state or the second high output state. The part that controls the ball state and the second high ball output state to the low ball output state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the adjustment can be terminated when the advantageous state of the number of termination determinations occurs in the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a big hit).
The end condition is that the number of variable displays executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reaches the end determination number (for example, after the determination). "100", which is a value set as the remaining number of variable displays, becomes "0" by executing 100 variable displays).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the adjustment can be completed when the variable display of the end determination number is executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of the eighth form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh forms.
The end condition is that the magnitude of the game value used for the game after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reaches the magnitude of the end determination. (For example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-4, after setting the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1", the game ball or the out slot that has won a prize in each winning slot during the period of the consecutive villa state. The part where the value of the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the total number of entered game balls reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the adjustment is terminated when the magnitude of the game value used for the game reaches the magnitude of the end determination after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value. can do.

The gaming machine of the 9th form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 8th forms.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the initialization means (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 is shown in FIGS. 11-11) for initializing the stored contents of the storage means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. When the game control main process shown is executed, the process of step S6a and step S6b is executed based on the fact that the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N)).
Equipped with
When the stored contents of the storage means are initialized by the initialization means, the first value is set in the predetermined numerical data (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, the CPU 103 performs the step S6b. The part that sets "0" corresponding to the low ball output state as the value of the ball output state flag in the process),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the adjustment from being performed at the start of power supply.

The gaming machine of the form 10 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 9.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped is provided.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the predetermined numerical data is restored based on the value of the predetermined numerical data held in the storage means (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 determines FIG. 11 When the game control main process shown in -11 is executed, if the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) including the update process of the payout status flag by the backup data is executed. Therefore, if the ball is in a high ball output state when the power failure occurs, the ball is restored to the high ball output state, and if the ball is in a low ball output state when the power failure occurs, the ball is restored to the low ball output state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, if the predetermined numerical data at the time of occurrence of the power failure is the second value, the adjustment can be continued at the time of recovery from the power failure.

The gaming machine of the 11th form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 10th forms.
Notifying means capable of notifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, in the ball ejection state determination process, the ball ejection state flag is set in the process of step S162SG06. A portion that starts lighting of the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 in the process of step 162SG08 after the value is set to "1").
It is characterized by that.
It can be recognized that the adjustment is performed because the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the form 12 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
A light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting units (for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071) whose light emission is controlled by the game control means. And, with
The notification is performed by causing the light emitting unit to emit light (for example, a portion for notifying the high ball ejection state by lighting the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, notification can be performed by light emission control common to other light emitting units by the game control means.

The gaming machine of the form 13 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 12.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 A part for executing the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the payout state specification command in the process of SGS17).
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form 14 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 13.
A specific effect that can suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach effect) and a notice effect that announces the execution of the specific effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect) can be executed. An execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) is provided.
The effect executing means limits the execution of the advance notice effect in a predetermined period before the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value by the updating means (for example, FIG. 11-). As shown in 23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the limit number of pre-reading in the process of step 162SGS242b of the pre-reading notice setting process, and the remaining number of variable displays after determination is When the number of read-aheads is less than or equal to the limit (step 162SGS242b; Y is the part where the look-ahead notice effect is not executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming unsuitable because the adjustment is not executed because the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of an ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is pseudo-like a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric parts including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal diagram game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed in the special figure of "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special map, the probability determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special map display result as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is a probable change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is a game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the ratio of the gaming ball passing through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 109SG)
Next, the feature portion 109SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

As the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-99572 (Patent Document 1), the conventional gaming machine can notify the effect result by the operation of the movable body (execution of the specific effect) and can output the effect sound. Some are equipped with various speakers (sound output means).

As the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed by repeatedly operating the movable body in a period before the specific effect is executed. It is conceivable that the player pays attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed by executing the effect. Further, as such a game machine, the repetitive operation of the movable body as a suggestion effect is completed before a predetermined period before the specific effect, and the type of the effect sound output from the speaker is different before and after the predetermined period (. It is conceivable to improve the game entertainment by changing the type of production sound output from the speaker), but it is possible that the type of production sound output from these speakers has changed before and after the predetermined period. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to recognize due to the movement of the movable body.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which it is easy to recognize that the type of effect sound has changed before and after a predetermined period.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the gaming board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. ..

The movable body unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located in the center of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction, and the second movable body 109SG402L is located in the left part of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction. The third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

Further, the movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third. It has a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the feature unit 109SG can operate separately from the first movable body 109SG401. Further, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is a retracted position which is a lower position of the image display device 5 by being driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421. (See FIG. 10-3 (A)), the suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 10-3 (B)), the effect above the suggested position and also the front position of the image display device 5. It can be moved to the position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are retracted positions (FIG. 10) which are lower positions of the image display device 5 by driving the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423. It is possible to move from -3 (A)) to the left-right proximity position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)) of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the effect position.

In the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) to 10-3 (C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all in the retracted position. The first state of the movable body unit 109SG400 and the first movable body 109SG401 are located at the suggested positions, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the retracted positions. The second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the effect position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located close to the left and right sides is defined as the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400.

FIG. 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening, which notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", a judgment result of a big hit type (probability change or non-probability change), and a small hit as a winning judgment result. .. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for the variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the feature unit 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 109SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the feature unit 109SG) (about 1 in the feature unit 109SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes It is a table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is generated in the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. In a high base state where a game ball can easily enter the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 109SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 109SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-7 (B). In the feature unit 109SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). .. Further, in the big hit game state by "probability change big hit C" and "non-probability change big hit", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is a probability variation jackpot, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state continuously occurs without going through the normal state. , So-called consecutive villa state.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability variable big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type to the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the winning ball is small. It is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In the feature unit 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 109SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and the like are provided. It may be provided.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG corresponds to a special hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 109SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 109SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In the feature unit 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern). And PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot).

If the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation patterns to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) and PB1. -2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) To decide from.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have the same number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, while PB1-2 and PB1. The number of determination values assigned to -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is different. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 2 pieces are determined for PB1-1, 45 pieces are determined for PB1-2, 150 pieces are determined for PB1-3, 300 pieces are determined for PB1-4, and 500 pieces are determined for PB1-5. Each value is assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, there are 2 determination values for PB1-1, 30 for PB1-2, 135 for PB1-3, 315 for PB1-4, and 515 for PB1-5. Each is assigned. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of superreach β1 and β2 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot PB1-4. Alternatively, since it is determined to be PB1-5, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected, and the variation pattern is determined as PC1-1 (variation pattern for special hits) using the variation pattern determination table for special hits. do. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 deviation variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the fluctuation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α2 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 deviation) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 109SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the variable display of the super reach α1 (variable display of the variable patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in the feature unit 109SG has a special figure variable display time of 40. It is a second, and it is a variable display that executes a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A as the reach effect of the super reach. The variable display of Super Reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and as a super reach reach effect, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B is produced. It is a variable display to execute. The variable display of Super Reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a super reach reach effect, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. It is a variable display to execute. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a super reach reach effect, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. It is a variable display to execute.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot expectation of each variable display in the feature unit 109SG is set to the highest jackpot expectation of super reach β2, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2. , Super reach α1, normal reach, and non-reach are set in the order of high hit expectation (big hit expectation in each variable display in this feature unit 109SG: super reach β2> super reach β1> super reach α2> super reach α1. > Normal reach> Non-reach).

In other words, paying attention to the variable display of the super reach, in this feature unit 109SG, which of the ally character A and the ally character B displayed as the battle effect (super reach effect) is the battle effect (super). The jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination of whether the enemy character displayed as the reach effect) is the enemy character A or the enemy character B.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 109SG is a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 109SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 109SG153, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), it is stored. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 109SG 151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 109SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Has been done. The effect control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 109SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 109SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 109SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. A storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 109SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A of the feature unit 109SG, a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is set in the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the hold storage.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower part of the image display device 5, and the first is displayed. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold storage display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (◇))) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, so that the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The storage contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”) and the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that has been shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the state is present (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" (step 109SGS102; N). Step 109 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" (step 109SGS105; N). Step 109 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 109SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 109SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step 109 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process of step 109SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 109SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 109SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-11) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-12), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 109SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 109SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines each determination as a random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6. 2 is selected and set (step 109SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 109SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 109SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 109SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 109SGS129). When the time reduction flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, in this feature unit 109SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance. However, as shown in FIG. 10-9, these are out of the deviation pattern determination tables A to C. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ..

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 109SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the reserved storage number changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that constitutes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 109SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and the step is performed. Proceed to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 109SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. Using the data, the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random number value MR3 is determined (step 109SGS138). In this feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 109SGS222).

If the reception command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

When the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; Y), or when the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226. When the receive command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), when the receive command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228. In the case (109SGS228; Y), when the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the reception command is vacant in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11. It is stored at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 109SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command). , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning command receive command buffer 109SG194A. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of the feature unit 162SGS234, when the reception command is the first ball ejection state specification command, it is determined that the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state, and the value of the ball ejection state flag for production is set to "0". If the receive command is the second payout state specification command, it is determined that the payout state is the first high payout state, and the value of the payout state flag for production is set to "1". If the receiving command is the third ball ejection state specification command, it is determined that the ball ejection state is the second high ball ejection state, and the value of the ball ejection state flag for production is set to "2". Set (update) to.

In the command analysis process of the feature unit 109SG, if the received command is any of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command, the received command is used at the start winning. The form of sequentially storing the free area of the receive command buffer 109SG194A from the beginning is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the receive command is the first start opening winning command, the hold storage number notification command is used. If a timer for waiting for reception is set and the hold storage number notification command is not received before the timer goes out, the entry hold storage that has not received the hold storage number notification command will be described later. It may be set out of the target of the reading notice effect.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and the hold storage (entry) in which the hold display flag is not set is set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109SGS242a). When there is no hold storage in which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated, and when there is hold storage in which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated. Further, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed depends on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. If is 2, the content of the process data of the variable display being executed may be referred to, and it may be determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (hold display flag is further set). It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the non-set entry) is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a miss or a jackpot. When it is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry is the first symbol designation command (symbol designation command indicating loss) (step 109SGS243b). ..

When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, when the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a big hit (step 109SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specification command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, the jackpot pre-reading (not shown) is performed. By referring to the advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIGS. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, two types of display patterns α and display patterns β are provided as display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display is displayed. It is displayed in the area 109SG005U.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-16, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probable big hit, and the player's expectation that it will be a probable big hit can be increased.

In addition, in this feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the display pattern α or the white star that displays the hold storage display in the white square (◇) by always deciding the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is variable even when it is a big hit. A case may be provided in which it is determined not to execute the pre-reading notice effect as in the case where the display result is “off”.

Further, in step 109SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when the command indicates an error (step 109SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variable category indicated by the variable category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 109SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIGS. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 109SGS247. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area is represented by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on the 109SG005U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star shape (☆), which is a specific mode, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold. It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, it is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D or the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U in a round shape (◯) in which the reserved storage display is a normal mode.

As shown in FIGS. 10-16, when the variable display result is "off" and the variation pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "off" and the variation pattern category is "non". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than in the case of "reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other". Further, when the variable display result is "off" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α. Alternatively, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “missing”.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable big hit)", when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "big hit" and the jackpot type will be "probability variable jackpot". Since the ratio is increased, the player's expectation can be increased.

After the execution of step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 109SGS249).

After the execution of step 109SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, “2” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 109SGS249 (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS249). 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, as described above, even when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry is also entered. After setting the hold display flag to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the hold storage newly stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in the display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. NS. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift are shown in FIG. 10-17. As shown, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in FIG. 10-17. , When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", the display mode is "☆". It is displayed in. If the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is two, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", the display mode of the hold storage display is "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the mode. If the number of the second special figure reserved storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display is a reserved display of the corresponding reserved storage. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, in the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "○" and the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "☆", the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is displayed. Is displayed. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the hold storage display is also displayed in a predetermined shift direction (screen in the feature unit 109SG) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold storage each time the variable display is executed. Shift toward the center of.

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift is started. Based on the hold storage of the receive command buffer 109SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold storage due to the start winning. In that case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 109SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D is not limited thereto. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 109SG005U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, the feature unit 109SG determines in step 109SGS242 whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning, provided that the command at the time of starting winning is newly stored. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 is performed. If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of determination of execution and non-execution of the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of a decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold storage of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but this is the present invention. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the second special figure. You may decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold storage in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is determined. When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state / low-accuracy high-base state) in which high-opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special figure.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 109SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, "7" as a stop symbol. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probabilistic big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. Determine (missing symbol).

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 109SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 109SGS284). Further, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 converts the image data in the variable display including the image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into the VRAM each time the first time elapses. The writing and display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIGS. 10-20).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; Y), the second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and each time the first time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 of the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423. Take control. As a result, the movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 10-20).

After the execution of step 109SGS288, or when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag during the effect display process (step). The value corresponding to S172) is set, and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109SGS286).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). When the variable display is a variable display of super reach (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is set to -1 (step 109SGS303c).

After the execution of step 109SGS303c, or when the super reach is not variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

In step 109SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 109SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

When the variable display is a variable display of super reach (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer is timer-out (109SGS309g). When the movable body control timer is out of time (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set again in the movable body control timer), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not a variable display of super reach (step 109SGS309f; N) and the movable body control timer is not timer-out (step 109SGS309g; N), execute the processes of step 109SGS309h and step 109SGS309i. Proceed to step 109SGS310 without proceeding.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is the next display screen (33 ms from the time of the previous image update) during the variable display including the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right. Image data of the screen to be displayed after the lapse of time) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, in the image display device 5, variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (display control of moving images) are realized. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern. Further, the first time is reset to the variable display control timer (step 109SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer is not timer-out (step 109SGS310; N), after the execution of step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timer-out (step 109SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set as a special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 109SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 in the feature unit 109SG will be described. The effect mode of the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, regarding the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, when the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 is started, the first enlarged display period , The character image displayed on the image display device 5 in the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of the super reach α1, the reach effect of the ally character A and the enemy character A, and the reach effect of the super reach α2). If so, the enlarged display of the ally character A and the enemy character B) is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the normal display magnification (1x) to the display magnification m1 at a constant speed, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The image is magnified at a constant speed up to a magnification of m2, and in the third magnified display period, the character image is magnified at a constant speed from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3. Then, after the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period elapses. ..

In the feature unit 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the difference between the display magnifications is the largest between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3. Is the smallest. That is, in the feature unit 109SG, regarding the enlargement speed of the character image, the enlargement speed of the first enlarged display period is set to be the fastest, and the enlargement speed of the third enlarged display period is set to the slowest (enlargement speed of the character image: 1st enlarged display period> 2nd enlarged display period> 3rd enlarged display period). In the feature unit 109SG, "fast enlargement speed" means that the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is large.

Hereinafter, in the feature unit 109SG, the period T2, the third enlarged display period, and the character image are the combined period (the period for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect) of the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period described above. A period including a predetermined period for maintaining the display magnification at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable display ends from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As an effect of notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to a close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are each. The movable body operation effect A for moving the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retracted position (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the variable display result is out of alignment during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed.

Hereinafter, in the feature unit 109SG, the execution period of the movable body effect A and the out-of-order notification effect may be referred to as a period T4. For these periods T2 to period T4, period T3 is the shortest period and period T4 is the longest period (length of period T2 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3).

Further, during the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the effect image is also displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body operation effect A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body extends over the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period). A movable body motion suggestion effect A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the 109SG401 at a speed V1 is executed.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, as a part of the above-mentioned movable body operation effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are imaged from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over a period T4. It moves (spreads) toward the edge of the display device 5. The absolute value of the velocity V2 is larger than the absolute value of the velocity V1. That is, the movable body motion effect A in the feature unit 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves at a higher speed than the movable body motion suggestion effect A.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the light emission of the movable body LED 109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the movable body LED109SG495 has the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) and the middle of the period T3 (more accurately). Makes the movable body LED 109SG495 emit light at the brightness C1 from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at the luminance C2, which is higher than the luminance C1, over the period T4.

In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, it is possible to output four types of production sounds such as BGM, SE (sound effect), operation suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound of music, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. The type of sound that is output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the BGM is a production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. Output is stopped. That is, the output of the BGM in the reach effect is executed from the start timing of the reach effect to the end timing of the period T2 and over the period T4.

Further, SE (sound effect) is a directing sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of variable display like BGM, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which the output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. .. That is, the output of SE in the reach effect is executed over the entire reach effect.

The motion suggestion sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. That is, the motion suggestion sound is output only in the period T2 which is the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and is not output in other periods. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body operation effect A. That is, the jackpot notification sound is output only in the period T4, which is the execution period of the movable body motion effect A when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is not output in other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, regarding the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, when the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2 is started, the first enlarged display period, the first Character image displayed on the image display device 5 during the 2 magnified display period and the 3rd magnified display period (if the reach effect of the super reach β1, the ally character B and the enemy character A, and the reach effect of the super reach β2) Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is executed.

After that, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, the light emission mode of the movable LED 109SG495, the output of the BGM, SE, the operation suggestion sound, and the jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown in FIG. 10-. The description of the same embodiment as the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 shown in 21 and FIG. 10-22 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, during the reach production of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is variable from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As an effect of notifying that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the respective retracted positions. The movable body motion effect B to be moved (changes the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-24, if the variable display result is out of alignment during the reach production of super reach β1 and super reach β2, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed. The movable body effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4 as in the above-mentioned movable body effect A and the out-of-order notification effect.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) is extended. The movable body motion suggestion effect B for repeatedly moving (reciprocating) the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is executed. The period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect B is shorter than the above-mentioned period T3 (the period T1 is shorter than the above-mentioned period T3. Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3> period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the movable body is used in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period. While the motion suggestion effect is executed, the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed in the third enlarged display period. Further, in the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the first enlarged display period has the fastest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large), and the third. The enlargement display period is set to the slowest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), when the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B are compared, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. The 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. Is not moving, whereas the movable body motion suggestion effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG 401 is an effect of repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggested position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), when the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B are compared, the movable body motion effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the proximity position of the first movable body moved to the effect position (the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the first state to the third state), and a plurality of This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S diffuses from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2. The movable body motion effect B moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position, and moves the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effect position. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display that a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are diffused from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion effect A. Further, both the movable body operation effect A and the movable body operation effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, the display mode of the reach effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-27 to 10-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), after a while after the variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 is started. , The decorative symbol displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R stops at a combination indicating reach. Then, when a predetermined period elapses in the reach state, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (C). ) And FIG. 10-28 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIG. 10-27 (D) and FIG. (See FIG. 10-30 (A)), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (E) and FIG. 10). -32 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (F) and 10-. 34 (A)).

At the start of the reach effect of these super reach, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are the left and right upper ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative symbol displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative symbol is temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect, which is the reach effect of the super reach α1, is approached, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), allies The display of the moving image in which the character A attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (C) to 10-28 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (D) to 10-28 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are the first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A having these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first magnified display period to the third magnified display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (E) to 10-28 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. Display at. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-29 (H) and 10-29 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping with the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. NS.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. Movie that the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character A in the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (J) and 10-29 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being off (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of the big hit shown in 10-29 (I), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) and 10-30 (B), the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) as the reach effect of the super reach α2 is shown in FIG. 10-30 (C). As a result, the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (C) to 10-30 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (D) to 10-30 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B having these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first magnified display period to the third magnified display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-31 (G) to 10-31 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping with the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. NS.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. Movie that the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B in the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (J) and 10-31 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being off (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of the big hit shown in 10-29 (I), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (C). At the same time, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (C) to 10-32 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (D) and 10-32 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first magnified display period to the third magnified display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (G) to 10-33 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B and the enemy are in the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping with the image of the character A.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. Movie that the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character A in the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J) and 10-33 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being off (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of the big hit shown in 10-29 (I), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (C). At the same time, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (C) to 10-34 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first magnified display period to the third magnified display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not emitted.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (G) to 10-35 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B in the central portion of the image display device 5 is used as the movable body operation effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping with the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed of V2. The type effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. Movie that the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B in the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (J) and 10-35 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified.
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being off (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of the big hit shown in 10-29 (I), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, as shown in 10-31 to FIG. 10-35, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B enlarges the images of the ally character and the enemy character during the reach effect. Since the display and the effect of the movable body motion effect B by the movable body (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, since the enlargement speed of the image of each character differs between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the effect of the effect in the enlarged display period can be improved. Since the operating speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, it is possible to reduce the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body operation effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period is slower than that of the first enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed is Since the enlargement speed is further slower than the second enlarged display period, the enlarged display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, so that the game entertainment can be improved. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the enlargement speed of the first magnified display period is the fastest and the magnified speed of the third enlarged display period is the slowest, but the present invention is not limited to this. (3) The enlargement speed of the enlarged display period may be the fastest, the enlargement speed of the first enlarged display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period may be the fastest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, since the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period, the player to the reach effect by executing the pre-reading notice effect. It is possible to prevent the attention of the person from being reduced. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over the entire execution period of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice is not limited to this. The period for limiting the execution of the effect may be only a part of the reach effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a form in which the pre-reading notice effect is not executed during the reach effect as a form for restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , During the reach effect, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can visually recognize the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35. In addition, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the visibility of the reach effect is lowered. That is, since the visibility of the reach effect effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) changes according to the operation status of the first movable body 109SG401, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 is used as the movable body operation suggestion effect. It is possible to easily understand whether it is an operation or an operation as a movable body operation effect, and it is possible to adjust the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the effect image of the reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed, the BGM, SE, and motion suggestion sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed. Since the BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, they are output from the speakers 8L and 8R before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401. Since the period T3 is shorter than the period T2 for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion effect is the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for it, and the period for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect becomes longer than the period for executing the movable body motion effect in the reach effect of the suggested target. It is also possible to prevent a decrease.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the movable body LED109SG495 is turned off by turning off the movable body LED109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body operation effect or the detachment notification effect. During the period when is off, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body is operated. In the motion effect B, all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated. It is possible for the player to easily distinguish whether the movement is also an action.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light with the luminance C1 and the movable body operation effect is produced. Since the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1, the brightness of the movable body LED109SG495 makes it easy for the player to recognize that the movable body operation effect is being executed. , It is possible to improve the entertainment of the game during the execution of the movable body movement effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, while the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach effects are displayed. The effect image (the image of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B) is displayed at a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, the effect image of the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Since the visibility of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made to stand out, the player can be made to pay attention to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, the speed V2 in which the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are faster than the speed V1 in the image display device 5. Since it is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, it is possible to make a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in the movable body motion effect A, and these Since the player can be attracted to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2, the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (F) and 10-30 (F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is hidden in the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the off-off notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is a movable body motion effect or an out-of-order notification effect.

Although the feature portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, , Illustrates a form in which the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the enlarged display start timing of the effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) of the reach effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect is set before the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating operation of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect is performed. Can raise the attention of the player.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the magnified display period and the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the magnified display period are almost the same (the display magnification is slightly different). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 109SG-2, after the end of the enlarged display period, the image display device 5 displays a specific effect. And by displaying an effect image or the like, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period may be different. By doing so, after the enlarged display period has expired, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended.

Further, the feature unit 109SG can display the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R in the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-3, in the image display device 5, depending on the progress of the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character executed as the reach effect. The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, it corresponds to the movement of these movable bodies. The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

Further, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, the explosion effect according to the movement of these movable bodies is possible. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, thus improving the game entertainment. can.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the ally character and the enemy character are visually recognized in the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect. Although the embodiment that does not change the sex is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-4, the movable body motion suggestion effect and the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification after the enlarged display period ends. During the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character. You may let me. Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed (when the variable display result is a big hit), the contrast and the brightness in the image display device 5 are changed from the first low visibility state to the second low visibility state, which is further lower. The visibility of the ally character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the deterioration of the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character in the image display device 5. At the time of executing the movable body effect, attention to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R can be raised.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-5, the movable body motion effect is being executed. The image display device 5 may display different effect images. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is based on the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion effect. May be more. By doing so, the number of variations of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect can be increased, so that the game entertainment at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body operation effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, While the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, while the image display device 5 displays the movable body motion suggestion effect. As the body motion effect compatible image, an image different from the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image may be displayed.

Further, when the image display device 5 can display the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect, the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect are set. It may be different. By doing so, the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image are combined with the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect). It is possible to display in an appropriate period corresponding to (whether it is the execution of the movable body motion effect).

Further, when displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect may be lowered by lowering the contrast and the brightness of the image display device 5. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the player's attention can be raised to the movable body motion effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect.

Further, when displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect on the image display device 5, the speaker 8L8R outputs the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and outputs the image display device 5 When displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the speaker 8L8R may output the sound corresponding to the movable body motion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect. By doing so, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect and at the time of executing the movable body motion effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed or the movable body motion effect is being executed.

Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 can move on the image display device 5 from the timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. The display of the image corresponding to the body movement effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player that the movable body movement effect is started during the reach effect of the super reach, and it is also possible to increase the attention to the movable body motion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, in the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are directed toward the first movable body 109SG401 in the image display device 5. Although the embodiment in which the display moving at the speed V1 is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range. It may be variable. In this case, for example, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, when a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is set to the speed of the first movable body 109SG401. The speed is changed to a low speed (changes the speed V1 to a low speed) as it approaches. The speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the time of executing the movable body motion effect A may be set to be faster than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggestion effect A is executed, the moving speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, so that the game entertainment is improved. can.

Further, the feature unit 109SG outputs a motion suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, and notifies the jackpot of the speakers 8L and 8R to 1 according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of outputting sound has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound output from these speakers 8L and 8R. ..

Further, in the case where a plurality of sounds can be output as the operation suggestion sound and the big hit notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the operation suggestion sound and the big hit notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the output of the suggestion sound or the jackpot notification sound is started. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect or the movable body motion effect is being executed by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and according to the output timing. Since these motion suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In particular, when the output timing of the operation suggestion sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the variable display result. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the motion suggestion sound starts, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the jackpot notification sound is started, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first movable body 109SG 401 is moved at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the first movable body 109SG401 is reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect is used. The first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at a position near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG 401 is made to stand by at the retracted position until the movable body motion effect or the disconnection notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to stand by at the suggested position until the movable body motion effect or the disconnection notification effect is started. May be good. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the effect position, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggested position after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, it is possible to evoke a player's expectation that the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG 401 is set between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is different between the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect and the time of executing the movable body motion effect. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body). Although the embodiment of the movement control of the 109SG402R) is executed based on the control timer, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body are not limited to this. In addition to the movement control of the above, the lighting control of the LED provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

In this way, when executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, for example, for the effect control every 1 ms. The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (S73 to S77 are executed every 1 ms in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8), the effect image update control is performed every 33 ms, the movable body movement control is performed every 1 ms, and the LED. The lighting control of the timer may be executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the effect sound may be executed every 1 ms. In particular, when executing the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, the movement control of the movable body (motor 109SG421 for the first movable body, motor 109SG422 for the second movable body, for the third movable body) is always performed. Since the drive control of the motor 109SG423) is executed together, it is possible to preferably execute the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of light emitting modes of the movable body LED109SG495 are used. The ratio of the movable body LED 109SG495 controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on which mode the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion effect.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a form in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 are provided as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed as the movable body motion suggestion effect A in any of the modes. The ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the feature unit 109SG performs a reciprocating motion (movable body motion suggestion effect) between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG 401 during the third enlarged display period. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is executed even in the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, in some cases where the variable display result is a big hit, the third expansion can be performed by enabling the reciprocating operation between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the third enlarged display period. Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestion effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. Although the embodiment suggesting the execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B by repeatedly moving the body (movable body motion suggestion effect B) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these are specified. The execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in an aspect other than the display of the image of the above and the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG 401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED109SG495) as shown in the feature unit 109SG, the movable body operation effect A or the movable body operation is performed depending on the lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED. It may suggest the execution of the effect B.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B in the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although a mode in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed (see FIGS. 10-28 (D) and 10-30 (D)) in a reduced state is illustrated, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a timing before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B (for example, FIG. 10-28 (C)). And the timing of FIG. 10-30 (C)), the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started.

In this way, when the image display device 5 starts displaying a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S from a timing before the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B is lowered, the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started. By increasing the transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the ally character A and the enemy character A) Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made easier to see than when the contrast is lowered.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (G) and the like, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 and displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body motion effect is executed. The present invention exemplifies a form in which a part of the effect image is invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is displayed when the movable body motion effect is executed. The explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to the movable body motion effect may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, so that all the other effect images are invisible.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for executing the movable body motion effect is not limited to this. The timing may be other than during the reach production of Super Reach. For example, as a modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A), 10-36 (B), and 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (H), a combination of decorative symbols is used. It may be possible to execute the movable body motion effect during the period from the reach to the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (B), the movable body motion suggestion effect is first started after the reach is reached, and in the image display device 5, the reach effect to be executed after that is highly expected (big hit). Reach effect (for example, reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) and low expectation (big hit game state) Which of the reach effects (for example, the reach effects with lower expectations than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) As a branch effect for notifying whether to branch to, the image of the character with the eyes closed is displayed. As the branch effect, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (C), during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display that executes a low expectation reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (E). The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character opening his eyes. That is, in the branch effect, the character displayed on the image display device 5 is darkened without opening the eyes, so that the reach effect with a high expectation is not executed (the reach effect with a low expectation is executed). Be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branching effect is completed), the reach effect with a low expectation is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a high-expected reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (F) to 10-37 (H). It is notified that a high-expected reach effect is executed by opening the eyes of the character. At this time, the movable body motion effect is also executed. Then, after the movable body motion effect and the branch effect are completed, the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.

That is, the movable body motion effect may be executed as an effect of notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled as exemplified in the feature unit 109SG, but it is informed that a high-expected reach effect is executed. It may be executed as an effect to be performed (an effect to notify that the degree of expectation controlled by the big hit game state is high).

In the present modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (B) and 10-37 (C), the character in the state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed in the image display device 5 as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character in a state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branching effect, the character is displayed on the image display device 5. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as a concentrated line, the player may be able to pay attention to whether or not the character opens his eyes.

As described above, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied as a branch of whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit during the reach effect of the super reach. As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch of whether a low expectation reach effect or a high expectation reach effect is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is a character image (the first specific image is the image of the character with the eyes closed, the second specific image is the image of the character with the eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. Corresponds to the above-mentioned images such as concentrated lines.

As shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body motion effect is executed as an effect of notifying that the reach effect of high expectation is executed, the effect is to be executed. Although the embodiment in which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed before the execution of the movable body motion effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body motion suggestion effect may not be executed. Further, the execution rate of the movable body motion effect may be different between the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed and the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed (the rate at which the high-expected reach effect is executed is different). (Explanation of feature unit 162SG)
Next, the feature portion 162SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 162SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-mentioned basic configuration, and the same configuration with the same reference numerals as the basic configuration is described here. The description will be omitted, and the feature configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 having the feature section 162SG different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the basic configuration will be described below.

FIG. 11-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG, the predetermined game board 2 is specified together with the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the ordinary symbol display device 20. A variable display time extension, which will be described later, for adjusting the number of game balls paid out (given to the player) in a unit period due to the determination of a high payout state at the lower left position of the game area, which is the position. A high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 for notifying by lighting that the adjustment or the jackpot period extension adjustment is being executed is provided so as to be visible to the player.

These high ball output state notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11 like the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20, and are connected to the main board 11 (microcomputer for game control). According to 100), lighting / extinguishing is controlled by executing a ball ejection state determination process (see FIG. 11-13) described later, and the lighting / extinguishing control cycle is the first special symbol. The cycle is the same as the control cycle of the display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG, the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed by determining the high ball ejection state by lighting the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071. Can be confirmed (understood).

FIG. 11-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 162SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command 96XXH is a ball ejection state designation command for designating the determination status of the ball ejection state determination in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the ball ejection state designation command, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), different EXT data are set according to the determination status of the ball ejection state determination. As a specific example, the command 9600H is a command for specifying the ball ejection state 1 corresponding to the low ball ejection state that is not determined to be the high ball ejection state, and the command 9601H is the command number of the first determination (5) for the number of consecutive villas of the big hit. The command 9602H is used as the command 9602H, and the number of consecutive villas in the jackpot is the second. 2 The command is to specify the ball ejection state 3 corresponding to the determination state determined to be the second high ball ejection state that is the number of determinations (10 times) or more.

The command 97XXH is a command for notifying the number of consecutive villas after the judgment, which is the number of times of the big hit state that occurred in the determined high ball output state after the determination of the high ball output state, and corresponds to the number of consecutive villas after the judgment. By setting the EXT data, the number of consecutive villas after the determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command 98XXH is a command for notifying the remaining variable display count after the determination, which is the variable display count (including the variable display count after the end of the high base state) executed after the determination of the high ball output state, and is variable after the determination. By setting the EXT data corresponding to the remaining number of display times, the variable remaining number of display after determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening, which notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, sudden probability), and the small hit as the judgment result at the time of winning. Is. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for the variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-3, in the feature unit 162SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 shown in FIG. 11-9, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 162SG uses a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. A separate display result determination table may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table 1 has a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table.

In the display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 162SG, a special figure is shown depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to. In the display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 162SG, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained as "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in this feature unit 162SG) (about 1 in this feature unit 162SG). / 30). That is, in the display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that

Further, FIG. 11-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 2 has a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a referenced table.

In the display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 162SG, the special figure shows whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "small hit" in the small hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is generated in the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. In a high base state where a game ball can easily enter the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 11-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 162SG has a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-5 (B). In the feature unit 162SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the big hit game by "probability change big hit C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The open period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than that of other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed open jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed even during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 162SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in the present feature unit 162SG, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 11-6). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability variable big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 162SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In addition, the big hit that occurred in the low base state may be described as the first big hit (first hit), and the big hit that occurred in the time saving state (high accuracy high base state and low accuracy high base state) may be referred to as the consecutive villa big hit (ream). It may be described as (per villa). In addition, the period between the big hit state and the high base state from the time when the first big hit (first hit) occurs to the time when it is controlled to the normal state after that is also called the consecutive villa period (advantageous period). In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, even if the probabilistic jackpot C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic jackpot C is set as the first jackpot (first hit), and the probabilistic jackpot C is used as the first jackpot. The period of the later high-accuracy and low-base state may be included in the consecutive villa period (advantageous period).

Although it is not carried out in this feature unit 162SG, instead of the probability variation jackpot C, a sudden time saving jackpot that makes the gaming state after the jackpot a low probability high base state may be provided. Suddenly, the time-saving jackpot becomes the first jackpot (first hit).

Further, for example, when a time-saving symbol (for example, a stop symbol of 137 or a stop symbol dedicated to time-saving that is not displayed in the variable display) is derived and displayed as a stop symbol, a round game for opening the special variable winning ball device 7 is executed. It may be controlled to the high base state without any trouble, and when it is directly controlled from the normal state to the high base state in this way, the start of the high base state is the timing of the start of the consecutive villa period (advantageous period). Will be.

That is, the consecutive villa period (advantageous period) is the period from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) to the time when it is controlled to the normal state thereafter. Is.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type to the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the winning ball is small. It is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 162SG. In this feature unit 162SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 162SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and the like are provided. It may be provided. Further, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 162SG is a special hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-6, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 162SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 162SG. In this feature unit 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-7, when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. Is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). When the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. Fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 11-7, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2 is different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present feature unit 162SG, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the variation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at a higher rate than the case where the variable display result is the non-probability variation jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present feature unit 162SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. The variation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach out-of-reach variation pattern) using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A. do.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. The fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss) using the fluctuation pattern determination table C. do.

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. It is determined from (non-reach out-of-time shortening variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time variation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach out-of-time variation pattern).

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 162SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the ball ejection state will be described with reference to FIG. 11-8. The ball ejection state flag in FIG. 11-8 is a flag updated by the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13, which will be described later, and is set to "0" when the ball ejection state is in a low ball ejection state. It is a flag that "1" is set when the ball is in a high ball ejection state and "2" is set when the ball is in the second high ball ejection state. It is possible to specify whether the state is a low ball ejection state, a first high ball ejection state, or a second high ball ejection state.

The variable display time of each variation pattern corresponding to the low ball ejection state in which "0" is set in the ball ejection state flag is the same as the variable display time of each variation pattern shown in FIG. 11-6, and the ball ejection state flag is set. The variable display time corresponding to the case where "0" is set in the state flag is not extended, but the variable pattern corresponding to the first high ball ejection state in which "1" is set in the payout status flag is variable. As for the display time, the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach off (PA1-1 to PA1-4), which has a high appearance frequency, corresponds to "0" in the ball ejection state flag, and the non-reach off (PA1-1 to PA1-) 4) When the variable display time longer than the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern is set and extended, and "1" is set in the ball ejection status flag, these extended variable display times are not set. By executing the variable display out of reach, the average variable display time becomes longer.

In addition, the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the second high ball ejection state in which "2" is set in the ball ejection state flag is non-reach off (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and normal reach, which frequently appear. The variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the miss (PA2-1) and the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) corresponds to the ball ejection status flag "1", and the non-reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and the normal reach miss (PA1-1-4). PA2-1) and the variable display time that is longer than the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot are set and extended, and if "2" is set in the ball ejection status flag, these are extended. By executing the variable display of the non-reach deviation, the normal reach deviation, and the normal reach jackpot of the variable display time, the average variable display time is further lengthened.

The extended variable display time is 1 second in the first high ball ejection state in which the ball ejection state flag is "1" for the non-reach PA1-1 which is a non-shortened fluctuation pattern, and the ball ejection state flag is "1". In the second high ball ejection state where the status flag is "2", it is 1.5 seconds, and for the non-reach PA1-2-2 non-reach PA1-4 which is a variation pattern of shortening, the ball ejection state flag is "1". It is 0.5 seconds in the first high ball ejection state, and 1.0 second in the second high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "2", which is a variation pattern of reach PA2. Regarding -1 and PB1-1, it is 0 seconds in the first high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "1", and in the second high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "2". 5 seconds.

The length of the variable display time to be extended shown in FIG. 11-8 is an example, and an extension different from these lengths may be performed. For example, in the second high ball ejection state, the extension may be longer than the extension in the first high ball ejection state.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-8, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach outlier, which is frequently executed due to the high determination rate, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, which is frequently executed as compared with the super reach, are extended. The average variable display time can be efficiently lengthened, and the data capacity of the reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, which have a large amount of data related to the effect due to the long variable display time, can be stored by storing multiple data by extending the variable display time. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "1 second" is set as a predetermined extension time for all fluctuation patterns. It may be uniformly added to the variable display time and extended, and for these extended periods, a common effect using common effect data in each variation pattern may be executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-8, in the first high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "1", only the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern is extended, and the ball ejection state flag is "2". In the second high ball output state, the average variable display time is further increased by increasing the variation pattern to be extended so that the reach fluctuation pattern is also extended when a certain second high ball output state is reached. Although it is possible to extend efficiently, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, regarding a fluctuation pattern in which the payout state flag is extended at "1" even when the payout state flag is "2". It may be possible to prevent the control load related to the extension from being excessively increased by further extending the ball so that the fluctuation pattern of the object to be extended does not change according to the ball ejection state. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-8, not only the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive villa period, but also the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 will be described later. As described above, these consecutive villa periods (advantageous period) have ended so that even if a big hit occurs again with a small number of variable display times after the consecutive villa period (advantageous period) ends and is controlled to the normal state. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 to the non-reach PA1-3 corresponding to the normal state is also extended so that the variable display in the normal state at the time of the normal state can be extended. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive villa period, may be extended. ..

In the RAM 102 of the feature unit 162SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001, for example, a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-9. Is provided. The game control data holding area 162SG150 shown in FIG. 11-9 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 162SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 162SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 162SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 162SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 162SG153, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 162SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), it is stored. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 162SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 162SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 162SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags including the above-mentioned ball ejection state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 162SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting unit 162SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 162SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-1 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 11-10 (A). A data holding area 162SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 162SG190 shown in FIG. 11-10 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 162SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 162SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 162SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 162SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. A storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 162SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A of the feature unit 162SG, whether or not the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 9) is undecided. That is, the display pattern is undecided because the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start prize. The display undecided flag indicating, and the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set, respectively, corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A of the feature unit 162SG, a storage area can be stored so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Is secured for each storage area (entry). In the command analysis process (FIG. 11-22), the effect restriction flag is a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a hold storage number, although a start prize is generated at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. When the notification command is not received within the first reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later, it is a flag indicating that the entry is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U provided at the lower part of the image display device 5, and the first is displayed. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold storage display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (◇))) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, so that the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that was terminated immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The storage contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”) and the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that has been shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-11. As shown in FIGS. 11-11, the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG also executes almost the same process as the game control main process in the basic configuration of FIG. 4, but features of the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG. The reason is that the contents of the recovery process of S4 are different, and the process of step S6b relating to the initial setting of the ball ejection state flag is added in addition to the initialization process of step S6a.

In the restoration process of step S4 of the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG, a process of restoring the ball ejection state flag to the state before the power failure is executed. As will be described later, in the power interruption process of step S19 in the game control timer interrupt processing of the feature unit 162SG shown in FIG. 11-12, the backup data stored when the power failure occurs includes the power failure occurrence. The data of the flag value of the payout state flag at the time is included.

As a specific recovery status of the ball ejection status flag, when the value of the ball ejection status flag is "0" corresponding to the low ball ejection state when a power failure occurs, the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" by the recovery process. Is set, and when the value of the ball ejection status flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball ejection state when a power failure occurs, "1" is set in the ball ejection status flag by the recovery process, and when a power failure occurs. When the value of the ball ejection state flag is "2" corresponding to the second ball ejection state, "2" is set in the ball ejection status flag by the recovery process. That is, by the restoration process of S4, the value before the power failure occurs is set in the value of the ball ejection state flag, and the ball ejection state before the power failure is restored.

The backup data described above also includes data on the number of consecutive villas after determination and the remaining number of variable display after determination, which will be described later, and the data on the number of consecutive villas after determination and the remaining number of variable display after determination are also in S4. It is restored to the data at the time of power failure by the restoration process.

In this way, the recovery process in step S4 restores the value of the ball ejection status flag to the value before the occurrence of the power failure, and also restores the data of the number of consecutive villas after the determination and the remaining number of variable displays after the determination. Even if an electric power failure occurs in the first ball ejection state or the second ball ejection state in which the ball ejection speed is adjusted, the adjustment of the ball ejection speed is not completed by the electric power failure, and after the electric power failure is restored. Will continue.

On the other hand, since the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S3, the initialization process of step S6a is executed, and the initial setting (including the initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive villas) at the time of turning on the power is executed. Later, the ball ejection state flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball ejection state, which is the initial value when the power is turned on. In this way, when the power is turned on (when the power supply is started other than the power supply recovery) when the power failure recovery condition is not satisfied, "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball output state, is set in the ball output state flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball ejection speed from being improperly adjusted when the power is turned on.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing of the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12. The game control timer interrupt process of the feature unit 162SG executes each process of steps S21 to S27 in the same manner as the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 5 in the basic configuration. In addition to these processes, the basic configuration The difference is that the power cutoff process in step S19, which was omitted in the above, and the ball ejection state determination process, which is a feature point of the game control timer interrupt process of the feature unit 162SG, are provided.

In the power cutoff process in step S19, it is detected whether or not the power supply cutoff signal is output from the power supply board 17 (whether or not it is turned on). The power supply cutoff signal is a signal output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the supplied power supply. When it is detected that a power cutoff signal has been output, as described above, the above-mentioned ball ejection state flag and the like necessary for restoring the state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 to the state at the time of power failure are included. Each game data is stored as backup data in the RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. If it is not detected that the power cutoff signal has been output, the power cutoff process is terminated. Then, after executing the ball ejection state determination process in step S20, each process of steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball ejection state determination process in step S20 of the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-13 (a). FIG. 11-13 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing content of the ball ejection state determination process in step S20.

In the ball ejection state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether or not the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state or the first high ball ejection state. It is determined whether it is in a state or a second high ball output state (step 162SGS01).

When the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), the number of consecutive villas stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of the RAM 102 is "5" or more, which is the first determination number. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS02). When the number of times of the first determination is not "5" or more, that is, when the villa is not in the villa state or when the number of villas is less than 5 even in the villa state (step 162SGS02; N). Ends the ball ejection status determination process. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number (step 162SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether or not the number of consecutive villas is "10" or more, which is the second determination number. Determination (step 162SGS03).

When the number of consecutive villas is not "10" or more, which is the number of second determinations (step 162SGS03; N), that is, when the number of consecutive villas reaches "5", which is the number of first determinations, the first ball is ejected. It is determined that the ball has been ejected, and "1" corresponding to the first ejected state is set in the ball ejection state flag (step 162SGS06), and the adjustment of the first stage is started as shown in FIG. 11-13 (b) (step 162SGS07). ). Since the update of the number of consecutive villas is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, the fifth jackpot of the number of consecutive villas is a jackpot in which the jackpot period extension adjustment of the first stage is not executed, and the first stage The jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the 6th to 10th jackpots of consecutive villas.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, the jackpot period extension adjustment is performed during the fanfare production period at the start of the jackpot state, which is the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 constituting the jackpot is not open, and the round game ends. The interval period from the start of the next round game to the start of the next round game, and the ending effect period at the end of the big hit state are extended from the low ball output state in which "0" is set in the ball output state flag, so that the same number of game balls are played. By extending the period of the jackpot game to be paid out, the number of game balls to be paid out in a unit time will be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, the extension lengths of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period are higher than those in the first high ball ejection state in which "1" is set in the ball ejection state flag. The second high ball ejection state in which "2" is set in the ball status flag is set longer, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the first high ball ejection state in which "1" is set in the ball ejection status flag is set. , The extension length is relatively short in the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, and the second high ball ejection state jackpot period extension adjustment in which "2" is set in the ball ejection status flag has a relatively extended length. It is a long second stage jackpot period extension adjustment.

Then, the lighting of the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is started, the notification that the high ball ejection state has been reached is started (step 162SGS08), and the variable display number of times after the determination of the high ball ejection state is determined is a predetermined number of times. In addition to setting the variable display remaining number (100) after the judgment to specify the remaining number of times until it reaches 100 times, it is the number of consecutive villa jackpots that occurred after it was judged to be in a high ball output state. After setting the initial value "0" for the number of villas (step 162SGS09), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. The feature unit 162SG exemplifies a form in which a predetermined number of times is 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these times depend on specifications such as a big hit probability and a big hit continuation rate. It may be changed as appropriate.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive villas is "10" or more, which is the number of second determinations (step 162SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive villas reaches "10", which is the number of second determinations, the second ball is released. It was determined that the state was reached, "2" corresponding to the second ball ejection state was set in the ball ejection status flag (step 162SGS04), and the adjustment of the second stage was started as shown in FIG. 11-13 (b). After that (step 162SGS05), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. Since the update of the number of consecutive villas is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpot after the 11th consecutive villa count.

Further, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is not "0" (step 162SGS01; N), whether or not the number of consecutive villas after the determination is 10 or more, which is the number of end determinations for ending the adjustment. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive villas after the determination has reached 10 times, which is the number of end determinations (step 162SGS10). The feature unit 162SG exemplifies a form in which the number of end determinations is 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these times are specified in specifications such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot continuation rate. It may be changed as appropriate.

When the number of consecutive villas after the determination is 10 or more, which is the number of end determinations (step 162SGS10; N), that is, after the number of consecutive villas is 5 or more and it is determined that the number of consecutive villas is high, the consecutive villa state is changed. When the number of consecutive villa jackpots that occur without ending reaches 10 times, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the low base state, that is, whether or not the consecutive villa state is finished. (Step 162SGS11), if the gaming state is the low base state (step 162SGS11; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS13. The number of consecutive villas is reset when the consecutive villa state ends and the low base state is reached.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive villas after determination is not 10 times or more which is the number of end determinations (step 162SGS10; N), or when the number of consecutive villas after determination is 10 times or more which is the number of end determinations (step 162SGS10; Y). When the gaming state is not the low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether or not the number of remaining variable display after determination set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

When the remaining number of variable display after determination is not "0" (step 162SGS12; N), that is, after the number of consecutive villas is 5 or more and it is determined that the ball is in a high ball output state, the variable display is 100 times, which is a predetermined number. If is not executed, the ball ejection state determination process is terminated.

When the remaining number of variable displays after the determination is "0" (step 162SGS12; Y), that is, when the variable display of 100 times, which is a predetermined number of times, is executed after the determination of the high ball output state is executed. Step 162 Proceed to SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, by updating the ball ejection status flag to "0", after the adjustment of the first stage or the second stage described above is completed (step 162SGS14), the lighting of the high ball ejection status notification LED 162SG071 is terminated. After the notification that the adjustment is being performed in the high ball output state is completed (step 162SGS15), the variable display remaining number after the judgment and the number of consecutive villas after the judgment are reset (step 162SGS16), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. ..

In step 162SGS17, after executing the transmission setting of the payout state specification command corresponding to the value of the payout state flag set in any of the steps of step 162SGS04, step 162SGS06, and step 162SGS13, the payout state determination is performed. End the process. The ball ejection state designation command set to be transmitted in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG.

As described above, by executing the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13 (a), the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to the time when the power supply is started, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (b). Similarly, when it is "0", neither the variable display time extension adjustment for extending the variable display time nor the jackpot period extension adjustment for extending the jackpot game period is executed, but the first ball ejection state determination process is performed. When the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated to "1" by determining that the ball ejection state is high, the variable display time is extended to the length of the first stage. The variable display time extension of the first stage is extended. Both the adjustment and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, in which the duration of the jackpot game is extended to the length of the first stage, are performed. Further, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated to "2" by determining the second high ball ejection state in the ball ejection state determination process, the variable display time is longer than that of the first stage. Both the second stage variable display time extension adjustment that is extended to the stage length and the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment that the jackpot game period is extended to the second stage length longer than the first stage It is executed, and it is notified by lighting of the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 that these adjustments are being executed.

Further, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", the number of consecutive villas after the determination reaches the end determination number, or the variable display remaining number after the determination becomes 0 (ball ejection status flag). When the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of is set to "1" or "2"), the value of the ball ejection status flag is updated to "0", and the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period The extension adjustment is completed.

Further, the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated from "0" to "1". The high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is not limited, and is not turned on from the timing when the value of the ball ejection status flag is updated from "0" to "1" during a normal game, and the ball ejection status flag is set. When a power failure occurs while the value is set to "1" or "2", the light may be turned on only for a certain period from the time of recovery from the power failure.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed. The invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be executed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed, and the ball ejection status flag value is "2". In some cases, both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (a), the CPU 103 transmits a ball ejection state designation command to the effect control board 12 only when the value of the ball ejection state flag changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 always issues a ball ejection state designation command every time the ball ejection state determination process is executed or every time the variable display is executed. It may be sent to. Further, in the feature unit 162SG, an embodiment in which a ball ejection state designation command is provided as a part of the effect control command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of these ball ejection state designation commands. , A game state designation command corresponding to each ball ejection state (low ball ejection state, first high ball ejection state, second high ball ejection state) may be provided.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 162SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 162SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 162SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "1" (step 162SGS102; N). Step 162 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 162SGS101 (step 162SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 162 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 162SGS104; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 162SGS105 (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "2" (step 162SGS105; N). Step 162 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS103 and step 162SGS106, the number of special figure hold storage corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 162SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 162SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 162SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 162SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step 162SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 162SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 162SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 162SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step 162 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS115), and then the process of step 162SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 162SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 162SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 162SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-16) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-17) described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 162SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103) first determines the state of the time saving flag and the probability change flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152. By confirming or the like, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is specified (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 162SGS121, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 162SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the above one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 162SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 162SGS123; N), the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 11-4 is displayed. Select and set (step 162SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 162SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 162SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 162SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 162SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 162SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 162SGS129). When the time reduction flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 162SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In the feature unit 162SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three is used. , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance. However, as shown in FIGS. 11-7, these are out of the deviation pattern determination tables A to C. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 small determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ..

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 162SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the reserved storage number changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 162SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 162SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that constitutes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 162SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 162 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS135), and the step is performed. Proceed to 162SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether or not the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A or a probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

When the determined jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step). 162SGS136), the process proceeds to step 162SGS138.

When the determined jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; N), that is, when the determined jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C, the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set. (Step 162SGS137), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS127, step 162SGS130, step 162SGS131, step 162SGS135, step 162SGS136, and step 162SGS137, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are executed. (Step 162SGS138), the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random number value MR3 is determined by using the numerical data indicating the above. In this feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), when at least the variable display result is “off”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. There are a variable category, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach). It suffices if it can be determined whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 162SGS138 to the effect control board 12 is set (step 162SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 162SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 162SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 162SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As data, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern are read out (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 162 SGS142, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 162SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 162SGS144), the process proceeds to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 162SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 reads the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Just do it. As described above, the process of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 162SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 162SG151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As data, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern are read out (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Step 162 Following the processing of SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 162SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 162SGS148), the process proceeds to step 162SGS149.

In step 162 SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-4 is used as a table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 162SGS150a). In this step 162SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the display result determination table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, and thus the step. In the processing of 162SGS150a, the special figure display result is "" using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a high probability state. By determining whether or not to make a "big hit", when the gaming state is in a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 162SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 162SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 162SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 (step 162SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability change B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability change C" corresponding to probability change jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 11-4 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure is compared. It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small hit" (step 162SGS150c). In step 162SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the first special figure. When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is turned on (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 162SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS156.

In step 162 SGS156, as a result of the preliminary determination of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on), whether or not to control the small hit gaming state (the small hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of (whether or not it is done) and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 162SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 162SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 162SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 162SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 162SGS163), and if it is not "probability variation jackpot C", that is, "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot C". In the case of either "probability variation jackpot" (step 162SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability change jackpot", the fluctuation pattern determination table A for jackpot is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B". , The jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 162SGS163; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS165).

In the determination in step 162SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 162SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166). When the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), the game state is changed to a probable state or a time reduction by determining whether or not the time reduction flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in the state (step 162SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 162SGS168; Y), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 162SGS168; Y). Step 162 SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 162SGS168; N), for example, the storage of the reserved storage number counter of the variation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. By reading the value or the like, the reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 162SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 162 SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 162SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 162SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS164, step 162SGS165, step 162SGS167, step 162SGS169, step 162SGS1711, step 162SGS173, and step 162SGS174, for example, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation or the like. By referring to any of the large hit variation pattern determination table, the special hit variation pattern determination table, or the loss variation pattern determination table A to D selected (set) based on the numerical data indicating Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS175). Even if the fluctuation pattern determined in this case is the same fluctuation pattern, if the value of the ball ejection state flag at that time is "1", the first high ball ejection state corresponds to the first high ball ejection state. The fluctuation pattern of the variable display time with one-step extension adjustment will be determined, and if the value of the ball ejection state flag at that time is "2", it corresponds to the second high ball ejection state. The variation pattern of the variable display time to which the extension adjustment of the second stage is performed will be determined.

That is, in step 162SGS175, the fluctuation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball ejection state flag.

When the jackpot flag is off, the variation pattern is determined in the process of step 162SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 162 SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “missing”.

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 162SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 162SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 162SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are set (step 162SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first hold storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is used as the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 162SGS177, the special figure variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the value of the ball ejection state flag, is set for the fluctuation pattern determined in step 162SGS175 (step 162SGS178). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). The time required. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 162SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is played from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The designated command, the first variable start command or the second variable start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command will be transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, and the variation pattern specification command are transmitted. , The game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, and the like may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S113 to the ON state, terminates the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 162SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), the small hit flag is further turned on. It is determined whether or not it is present (step 162SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to send the hit start 5 designated command corresponding to the small hit (step 162SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 162SGS190b). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 162SGS190d), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. 162SGS184), the effect control board 12, the hit start 1 designation command (probability change jackpot A), the hit start 2 designation command (probability change jackpot B), and the hit start 3 designation command (probability change jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored in the effect control board 12. ), Set to send the hit start 4 designated command (non-probability change) (step 162SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time corresponding to the execution period of the fanfare effect for notifying, for example, that the jackpot has occurred in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162SGS187). At this time, as the jackpot display time set in the jackpot display time timer, the jackpot display time corresponding to the ball ejection state flag is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21, if the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", 30,000 corresponding to the non-extended fanfare production period corresponding to the low ball ejection state of 30,000 milliseconds. Milliseconds are set as the jackpot display time.

If the value of the payout state flag is "1", 40,000 milliseconds corresponding to the fanfare production period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high payout state is set as the jackpot display time. If the value of the payout state flag is "2", the jackpot display time is set to 60,000 milliseconds corresponding to the fanfare production period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high payout state. ..

Then, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. After that (step 162SGS188), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), in step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". Although not particularly shown in this feature unit 162SG, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game completed in the jackpot game end process is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the CPU 103 has a probability variation flag and a time saving flag. Both are turned on (the game state is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state), and "0" is set as the value of the time reduction counter, and the jackpot type of the jackpot game completed in the jackpot game end process is the probability variation jackpot C. If there is, the probability change flag is turned on (the game state is controlled to the high probability and low base state), and "0" is set as the value of the time reduction counter. Then, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game completed in the jackpot game end process is a non-probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time reduction flag and sets "100" as the value of the time reduction counter. ing. Occasionally, the process proceeds to step 162 SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 162SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 162SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 162SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is reached. When is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), the time saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 162SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, and then the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low accuracy and low base) (step 162SGS195), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196. With the execution of step 162SGS195, the number of consecutive villas is also reset.

Then, after the determination, the variable display remaining number update process is executed (step 162SGS196). In this post-determination variable display remaining count update process, it is determined whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining count is "0", and if it is not "0" (when the remaining count exists), the remaining count is set to 1. Subtraction is updated, and if it is "0", the variable display remaining number update process after the determination is terminated.

Next, in step 162SGS197, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 162SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 162SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect of displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 is set as the jackpot end display time in the jackpot end display timer. (Step 162SGS202), and the process is terminated.

At this time, as the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer, the jackpot end display time corresponding to the ball ejection status flag is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21, if the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", the timer corresponding to the non-extended ending effect period corresponding to the low ball ejection state is 60,000 milliseconds. The value is set. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70,000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball ejection state, is set, and the ball ejection state is set. If the value of the flag is "2", the timer value corresponding to 90000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 162SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), after turning on the probability variation flag (step 162SGS210), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 162SGS207). After turning on the time saving flag (step 162SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 162SGS209), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), by executing step 162SGS211 and step 162SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 162SGS214). Then, the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on is set (step 162SGS215).

Then, the update process of the number of consecutive villas and the number of consecutive villas after the determination is executed (step 162SGS216). In this update process, specifically, whether the finished jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in the low base state or the consecutive villa jackpot that occurred in the high base state, for example, the finished jackpot. It is specified from the value of the state flag before the start of big hit (“0” for low base, “1” for high base) corresponding to the state before the occurrence of the first big hit, and if it is the first big hit, it is the number of consecutive villas. Set "1". On the other hand, in the case of a consecutive villa jackpot, since the number of consecutive villas is already a value other than "0", 1 is added and updated to the number of consecutive villas. Further, in the case of a consecutive villa jackpot, if the initial value is set in the number of consecutive villas after the determination, 1 is added and updated to the number of consecutive villas after the determination.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 162SGS217).

Although not particularly shown in this feature unit 162SG, when the number of round executions has not reached the set upper limit number of times in the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116), the CPU 103 responds to the value of the ball ejection state flag. Set the interval period timer. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21, if the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", the timer value corresponding to 5000 milliseconds, which is the non-extended interval period corresponding to the low ball ejection state. To set. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1", the timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball ejection state, is set. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball ejection state, is set.

After setting these timer values in the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer every time the jackpot opening post-processing is executed, and the CPU 103 is large based on the timer out of the interval period timer. While controlling the opening of the winning opening, the value of the special figure process is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the opening of the big hit, that is, a new round game is started.

As described above, in the present feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol to the end of the jackpot game based on the derivation display of the jackpot symbol, the payout state flag is set. Regardless of the value, the round game continues until a certain opening period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a certain number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) win the big prize opening. The number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 and 11-21, the game ball cannot win the big prize opening due to the closure of the big winning opening, that is, the fanfare effect that the prize ball cannot be won. The period, interval period, and ending effect period are lengthened as the value of the ball ejection status flag changes from 0 to 1 to 2.

For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value of the payout state flag, so that the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player is prevented from decreasing, and the game balls are large. By changing (prolonging) the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period, which are the periods during which prizes cannot be won, according to the value of the payout status flag, the number of prize balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased. It is possible to suppress it.

Next, the processing that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 162SGS221).

If there is a receive command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 162 SGS222). Then, when the command is the first start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the process of step 162SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192. Just do it.

If the reception command in step 162SGS222 is not the first start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224). Then, when the command is the second start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the process of step 162SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 162SGS224 (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step 162SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS228). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (step 162SGS228; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS229). ..

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 162SGS228 (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 162SGS230). Then, when it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS231). ..

Then, after executing any of the processes of step 162SGS229 and step 162SGS231, "1" indicating that the hold display mode is undecided is set in the display undecided flag of the stored entry (display undecided flag). If there is an unreceived command, the effect restriction flag is set to "1" (the display restriction flag is turned on) (step 162SGS232).

When the reception command is a symbol specification command in step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; Y), when the reception command is a variable category command in step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; Y), or in step 162SGS223, step 162SGS225, step 162SGS232. After executing any of the processes of, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS233) (step 162SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 162SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command). , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning command receive command buffer 162SG194A. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 162SGS230 (step 162SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 162SGS234), and then the process returns to step 162SGS221. For example, when the reception command is a ball ejection state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball ejection state from the ball ejection state designation command in the process of step 162SGS234, and responds to the specified ball ejection state. Processing such as turning the flag on may be executed. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the ball ejection state by referring to the flag.

When there is no receive command in the command reception buffer in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS221; N). 162SGS237). If the first reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 162SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated, and the first reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage number notification waiting time or the second reserved storage is completed. When the number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the corresponding storage incomplete entry is set to "1" in the effect restriction flag (the display undecided flag is turned on). End the command analysis process.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. Is determined by whether or not there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 162SGS242a; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS252, and if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 162SGS242a; Y), further determination is made. It is determined whether or not the remaining variable display count is equal to or less than the read-ahead limit (step 162SGS242b). When the number of remaining variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit (step 162SGS242b; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set as the hold display flag, as will be described later. It is set.

If the number of remaining variable displays after determination is larger than the number of read-ahead limits (step 162SGS242b; N), whether or not the effect restriction flag of the entry is in the ON state (whether or not "1" is set). Is determined (step 162SGS242c). When the effect restriction flag is on (step 162SGS242c; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, “0” corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the hold display flag, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the effect restriction flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the 4th symbol designation or the 6th symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a probable change. It is determined whether or not it is a symbol designation command indicating C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a). When the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set. , Set to the hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed for the reserved memory that becomes the probability variation big hit C or the small hit.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating probability variation big hit C or small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, a command indicating that the symbol designation command is off. (Step 162SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, or non-probabilistic jackpot) (step 162SGS243b; N), the entry. The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specification command of (step 162SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 162SGS244, the jackpot pre-reading (not shown) is performed. By referring to the advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed (step 162SGS245).

In step 162 SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 162SGS244. ..

Specifically, two types of display patterns α and display patterns β are provided as display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display is displayed. Displayed in area 5U.

If the variable display result is a jackpot other than the probabilistic jackpot C, the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always determined as the display pattern (notice type). The display pattern (notice type) of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A", the display pattern α determines the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type). It is set higher than the ratio to be set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpot A becomes high, and the player's expectation of becoming the probability variation jackpot A can be increased.

In this feature unit 162SG, when the variable display result is a "big hit" other than the probabilistic big hit C, the hold storage display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the pre-reading notice effect. The display pattern of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in the white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot C. Even in the case of a "big hit" other than the above, a case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "missing".

Further, in step 162SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when the command indicates an error (step 162SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variable category indicated by the variable category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 162SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 162SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 162SGS248).

In step 162 SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-24 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 162SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first reserved storage display area 5D or the second reserved storage display area is represented by a white square (◇) in which the reserved storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on 5U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold is displayed in a white star shape (☆) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. It is displayed in the storage display area 5U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category. Is set to be higher in the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") than when is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other". Further, when the variable display result is "off" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), and the pre-reading notice effect is not determined. The ratio at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is determined by the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “missing”. It is set higher than the ratio to be set.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variation A)" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A". Since the ratio of the above is increased, the expectation of the player can be increased.

After the execution of step 162SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined in step 162SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 162SGS249).

After the execution of step 162SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided (step 162SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 162SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, “2” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 162SGS249 (step 162SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating white "○" (step). 162SGS250), step 162SGS251.

After executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). After that, the hold display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS252). As a result, the hold storage newly stored in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A is displayed in the display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. NS. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A after the shift are shifted according to the stored contents of FIG. As shown in A), the hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", the display mode is "○" as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B). When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the display mode of. If the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is two, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", the display mode of the hold storage display is "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the mode. If the number of the second special figure reserved storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display is the corresponding reserved storage. As a mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag of, for example, the second hold storage display in the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "○" and the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "☆". Displayed in area 5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 5U.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), the reserved storage display also has a predetermined shift direction (this feature unit) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the reserved storage each time the variable display is executed. In 162SG, it shifts toward the center of the screen).

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift is started. Based on the hold storage of the receive command buffer 162SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold storage due to the start winning. In that case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 5U.

The feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 162SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 5D thereof is not limited thereto. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 5U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, it is determined in step 162SGS242 to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning, provided that the command at the time of the start winning is newly stored. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 162SGS242 If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of determination of execution and non-execution of the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of a decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold storage of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in this feature unit 162SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but this is the present invention. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the second special figure. You may decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold storage in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is determined. When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state / low-accuracy high-base state) in which high-opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special figure.

11-26 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted higher by one buffer number (step 162SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variation start command reception flag is off in step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to higher (step 162SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 162SGS272 or step 162SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, "7" as a stop symbol. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbol is "334", "778", etc., which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334", "778", etc., which are the same chances as the probability change big hit C. Decide from among. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the outlier, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. If the combination of the symbols other than the above-mentioned chance eyes (missing symbol) is determined and the fluctuation pattern is the reach fluctuation pattern, the combination of the reach-off decorative symbols such as "121" and "464" (missing symbol) is determined. ) Is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-27 to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in the variable display (step 162SGS277). It should be noted that the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the execution of any one of the four advance notice effects A to the advance notice effect D can be determined in the advance notice effect determination process, as will be described later. Is not limited to this, and the number of possible advance notice effects may be 3 or less or 5 or more.

In the notice effect determination process of the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the ball ejection state, and sets the advance notice effect type determination table corresponding to the specified ball ejection state (step 162SGS290). The payout state may be specified, for example, from the value of the flag that was turned on when the payout state designation command was received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, when the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball ejection state as the low ball ejection state, the notice effect type determination table A is selected, and the ball ejection state is set to the first high. When the ball ejection state is specified, the notice effect type determination table B may be selected, and when the ball ejection state is specified as the second high ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table C may be selected.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the variable pattern (step 162SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (missing, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probabilistic jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area.

Then, a random number for determining the advance notice effect is extracted, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the advance notice effect type when the advance notice effect is executed are determined using the advance notice effect type determination table set in step 162SG290 (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, when the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table A is used, and if the variable display result is out of reach, 85. %% Decided not to execute the advance notice effect A, 10% decided to execute the advance notice effect A, 5% decided to execute the advance notice effect B, and 0% decided to execute the advance notice effect C. The execution is decided, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% decides not to execute the advance notice effect, 50% decides to execute the advance notice effect A, and 30% decides to execute the advance notice effect B. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit excluding the big hit C, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 25%, and the notice effect is decided at a rate of 65%. The execution of B is determined, the execution of the advance notice effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the advance notice effect D is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table B is used, and if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at the rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect B is decided at the rate of 5%, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%, and the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%. The execution of the notice effect D is decided. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% decides not to execute the advance notice effect, 50% decides to execute the advance notice effect A, and 25% decides to execute the advance notice effect B. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit excluding the big hit C, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 25%, and the notice effect is decided at a rate of 50%. The execution of B is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 15%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball ejection state is the second high ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table C is used, and if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at the rate of 8%, the execution of the notice effect B is decided at the rate of 4%, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 3%, and the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%. The execution of the notice effect D is decided. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% decides not to execute the advance notice effect, 45% decides to execute the advance notice effect A, and 20% decides to execute the advance notice effect B. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit excluding the big hit C, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 15%, and the notice effect is decided at a rate of 45%. The execution of B is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 10%.

That is, as the notice effect in the feature unit 162SG, the notice effect D has the highest jackpot expectation (the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot), and the notice effect C has a higher hit expectation than the notice effect D. It is set low, the notice effect B is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the notice effect C, and the notice effect A is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the notice effect B. When the notice effect is not executed, the jackpot expectation is set lower than when any of the notice effects is executed (big hit expectation: notice effect D> notice effect C> notice effect B> notice effect). A> Notice production not executed).

In addition, paying attention to the number of advance notice effects that can be executed in each payout state, there are two advance notice effects that can be executed in the low payout state, the notice effect A and the notice effect B, and can be executed in the first high payout state. There are three notice effects: notice effect A, notice effect B, and notice effect C. There are four. That is, in this feature unit 162SG, the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display increases by continuing the consecutive villa state after the first hit occurs, so that the game is delayed during the consecutive villa. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the storage.

In particular, in the second high ball output state, the notice effect D for determining that the variable display result is a big hit can be executed, so that the notice effect D is executed during the variable display in the second high ball output state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is played, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined after the execution of step 162SGS292 (step 162SGS293). If the execution of the advance notice effect has not been decided (step 162SGS293; N), the advance notice effect determination process ends. When it is decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 162SGS293; Y), the advance notice effect type determined in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), the advance notice effect execution decision flag is turned on (step 162SGS295), and the advance notice is given. The production determination process is completed.

After executing the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 11-26, and in step 162SGS278, whether the effect control CPU 120 has the advance notice effect execution decision flag turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect of either "notice effect A" or "notice effect B" is determined in the advance notice effect determination process of step 162SGS277.

When the advance notice effect execution decision flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step 162SGS279, the timer for waiting for the advance notice effect is set to a value corresponding to the period until the start of the advance notice effect (step 162SGS279), and the advance notice effect is executed. The determination flag is turned off (step 162SGS280), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, when the advance notice effect execution determination flag is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without going through step 162SGS279 and step 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the advance notice effect, the feature unit 162SG performs an effect (not shown) showing a sign of execution of the advance notice effect before the timing when the advance notice effect is started, and starts the advance notice effect. Since the timing is set as the start timing of the advance notice effect, a shorter period than the period until the advance notice effect is started is set, and the start timing of these advance notice effects is the process table of the advance notice effect executed from the start of the advance notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and when these precursory effects are not performed in the advance notice effect, the advance notice effect is provided. Since the start timing is the start timing of the advance notice effect, the period until the start timing of the advance notice effect may be set in the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect.

In step 162 SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 specifies a ball ejection state and selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the specified ball ejection state and the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 162SGS282).

In addition, in step 162SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 may specify the output state by referring to the value of the effect ball ejection state flag set in the process of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis process.

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 162SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern specification command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball ejection state and the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 162SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 162 SGS286).

By executing the variable display start setting process by the effect control CPU 120 as described above, in the feature unit 162SG, the ball ejection state is any of the low ball ejection state, the first high ball ejection state, and the second high ball ejection state. Even so, it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol in conjunction with the variable display time of the special figure. In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which a variable display of a decorative symbol according to a ball ejection state can be executed by a value of a ball ejection state flag for effect and a variation pattern specification command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 specifies a variation pattern determination state that specifies in which ball ejection state the variation pattern specification command is determined together with the variation pattern specification command. A command can be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120), and each time the effect control CPU 120 receives these variation pattern specification commands and variation pattern determination state specification commands, a decorative pattern corresponding to the ball ejection state is received. You may want to perform a variable display of.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (step 162SGS301, step 162SGS302, step 162SGS303). Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set (it is determined to perform the advance notice effect), or the advance notice effect execution flag is on (during the execution of the advance notice effect). If there is) (step 162SGS304; Y), the advance notice effect processing is executed (step 162SGS305). If neither the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect nor the flag for executing the advance notice effect is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS306 without executing the advance notice effect process in step 162SGS305.

In step 162 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 162SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 162SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 162SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 162SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern. Further, the predetermined value is reset in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer is not timer-out (step 162SGS310; N), after the execution of step 162SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timer-out (step 162SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 162SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set as a special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 162SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

When the advance notice effect is executed with the advance notice effect start waiting timer set, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the advance notice effect start wait timer in the advance notice effect process, and starts the advance notice effect. Determines whether the wait timer has timed out. When the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect times out, that is, when the start timing of the advance notice effect is reached, the process table for the advance notice effect according to the type of the advance notice effect determined to be executed is selected, and the process for the advance notice effect is selected. Start the timer. That is, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the first process data in the advance notice effect process table. In addition, the advance notice effect processing is terminated with the advance notice effect execution flag turned on.

Then, when the advance notice effect is executed when the advance notice effect execution flag is on, the effect control CPU 120 performs subtraction update of the process timer for the advance notice effect, and the process timer for the advance notice effect is timer-out. Judge whether or not. If the process timer for the advance notice effect is not timered out, the control of the effector is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer being executed, and if the process timer for the advance notice effect is out of the timer. , Switch process data. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 may start the process timer for the next advance notice effect again and control the effect device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the advance notice effect processing as described above, the advance notice effect can be executed during the variable display.

In the above-mentioned feature unit 162SG, the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 exemplifies a mode in which only lighting / extinguishing is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a high ball ejection state. When the variable display time extension adjustment is executed because the variable display is executed in, but the jackpot period extension adjustment is not executed because it is not in the jackpot state, it lights up in green (first mode) and is high output. When the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed due to the jackpot state in the ball state, but the variable display time extension adjustment is not executed because the variable display is not executed, the light is turned on in red (second mode). Then, it may be possible to confirm (understand) which adjustment is being executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 162SG, the value of the ball ejection state flag is continuously updated from 0 → 1 → 2 in the continuous villa state (the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state from the low ball ejection state). By prolonging the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period of the jackpot game during the consecutive villa state, depending on the state and changing to the second high ball output), the ball output per unit time The embodiment in which the number is suppressed, that is, the speed at which the prize balls are given is reduced has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state, the low output is achieved. Special figure such as fluctuation pattern of super reach than ball state The fluctuation pattern is controlled to the big hit game state by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern judgment table for high ball output state where the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern is long. It is also possible to extend the period until the game is completed and reduce the number of balls to be played per unit time.

Further, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed for a form in which the fluctuation pattern can be determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table for the high ball ejection state in the first high ball ejection state and the second high ball ejection state. When the pending storage of the variable display that is executed after the remaining number of variable display after judgment becomes 0 when the remaining number of variable display after judgment is still set to a value of 1 or more, the effect pattern of the pre-reading notice effect There is a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by (Variable display is executed according to the variation pattern of reach, etc.), and there is a risk that the pre-reading notice effect will be inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the pre-reading notice setting process (see FIG. 11-23) of the above-mentioned feature unit 162SG, when the variable display remaining number after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number, the pre-reading notice effect is executed. By limiting, the look-ahead notice effect is inappropriate by preventing a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by the effect pattern of the look-ahead advance notice effect and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display. It can be prevented from becoming.

Further, although not particularly shown in the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball ejection state flag in the jackpot middle effect process shown in FIG. 9, and the value of the effect ball ejection state flag. By selecting the process table for the fanfare effect according to the above and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer, the fanfare effect according to the ball ejection state may be executed.

Further, although not particularly shown in the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball ejection state flag in the ending effect process shown in FIG. 9, and sets the value of the effect ball ejection state flag. The ending effect according to the ball ejection state may be executed by selecting the corresponding process table for the ending effect and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 162SG, the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIGS. 11-13 to determine whether the ball ejection state is a low ball ejection state or a high ball ejection state. If it is determined that the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to the high ball ejection state from "0" corresponding to the low ball ejection state. By setting the value according to "1", the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period during the jackpot game are lengthened (adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started. ) Is possible. In addition, after setting the ball ejection status flag to "1", the value of the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the variable display is executed 100 times, that is, the ball ejection state is set to high. By updating from the payout state to the low payout state, the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period during the big hit game are returned to the original period (the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball per unit time is completed. ). For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls paid out per unit time during the period of consecutive villas, and it is possible to prevent excessive increase in gambling due to excessive prize balls being paid out in a short period of time. ..

Further, in this feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is set from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. 11-8, only the special figure variable display time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set. By prolonging the period and not prolonging the special figure variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, the increase in the amount of data related to variable display is suppressed, and the variable display time of super reach and normal reach is lengthened. It prevents the decline of interest due to this.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball per unit time is started by setting the value of the payout state flag from "0" to "1", and the variable display of 100 times is displayed. An example is exemplified in a mode in which the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball is terminated by setting the value of the payout state flag to "0" again based on the execution, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, it is based on the fact that it is equipped with a time measuring means (for example, a real-time clock or a timer) capable of measuring time, and the time measuring means measures a certain time (for example, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, etc.) from the start of the adjustment. The adjustment may be completed. That is, the termination condition in the present invention may be "a certain time has elapsed during the period of the consecutive villa state after the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to" 1 "".

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, as an end condition for ending the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball per unit time, an example is provided in which only one variable display is executed 100 times. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of termination conditions for ending the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time may be provided. When a plurality of end conditions for terminating the adjustment are provided in this way, the adjustment may be terminated when any one of the end conditions is satisfied, or the adjustment may be terminated when the plurality of end conditions are satisfied. The adjustment may be completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state or the second high ball ejection state. In the state, the special figure variable display time in the fluctuation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "0" (when the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state). Therefore, by prolonging the period required for variable display, it is possible to lengthen the time interval until the variable display result becomes a big hit during the period of the consecutive villa state, and the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state can be increased. It is possible to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls during the period of the consecutive villa state without reducing it.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 and 11-21, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag during the big hit game, the value of the ball ejection state flag is set. The fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during which the game ball cannot win the big prize opening are set longer than when "0" is set. Therefore, the game ball cannot be won in the big winning opening between each round game during the big hit game without reducing the number of game balls that can be won in each round game according to the value of the ball ejection state flag. The period can be extended, and the payout speed of prize balls per unit time during the period of the consecutive villa state can be reduced.

In this feature unit 162SG, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag, it is a big hit game than when "0" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag. An example is an example of a form in which a total of three periods of a fanfare production period, an interval period, and an ending production period are lengthened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "1". When "2" is set, any one of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period during the jackpot game is set as compared with the case where "0" is set as the value of the ball ejection status flag. The two periods may be lengthened.

Further, in this feature unit 162SG, the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated from 0 to 1 to 2, so that the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the big hit game are gradually extended. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated from "0" to "1", the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period If one or two of these periods are lengthened and the value of the payout status flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining period may be lengthened.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the recovery condition is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to be low. Since "0" corresponding to the state is set, it is possible to prevent adjustments that reduce the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, when the recovery upper limit is established, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started again due to a power failure, "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag when the power failure occurs. If it is set, the CPU 103 sets "1" or "2" as the value of the ball ejection status flag again, so that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball from the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure is adjusted. Can be resumed.

In this feature unit 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power failure, if "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag when the power failure occurs, the CPU 103 ejects a ball. Although the embodiment in which "1" or "2" is set again as the value of the state flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the ball is ejected. It is also possible to set "0" as the value of the state flag, that is, not to execute the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball that was executed when the power failure occurred. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored as backup data when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-13, when the CPU 103 determines in the ball ejection state determination process that the ball ejection state is in a high ball ejection state, the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is started to be lit by the control of the CPU 103. It is possible to recognize from outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball is being executed by lighting the high payout state notification LED 162SG071.

Although the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 can be turned on under the control of the CPU 103, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is an effect control. It may be an LED that can be turned on by the control of the CPU 120. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU103) can transmit control information (effect control command) capable of specifying whether or not the high-granted state is provided to the effect control means (effect control CPU 120). Therefore, the effect control means should be provided with a notification means (high ball output state notification LED 162SG071) capable of notifying that the control is controlled to the high grant state according to the identification of the high grant state from the control information. Just do it.

Further, the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is provided as a notification means capable of notifying that the high ball ejection state (high ball ejection state) is determined in the present invention. Is not limited to this, and the notification means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for notifying that it is determined to be in a high ball ejection state by a specific sound output, and a high ball ejection state. An image display means (for example, an image display device 5) that notifies that a determination has been made by displaying a specific image, and an information output means that can output information (signal) according to the determination of a high ball output state. And so on.

Further, the control cycle for turning on / off the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 shall be the same as the control cycle for turning on / off the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. Then, the CPU 103 can execute the notification by the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 by the lighting / extinguishing control common to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20. It has become.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the ball ejection state designation command in the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13, whereby the effect control board 12 (effect control) is executed. It is possible to send a ball ejection status specification command to the CPU 120). Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and sets the specified ball ejection state to the specified ball ejection state. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the effect type of the advance notice effect to be executed by using the corresponding advance notice effect type determination table. In particular, in this feature unit 162SG, a notice effect (preliminary effect type) that can be executed in each of the case where the ball output state is the low ball output state, the first high ball output state, and the second ball output state. Is different, so it is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing the advance notice effect according to these ball ejection states.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, it is executed in the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state, the first high ball ejection state, and the second ball ejection state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state and the case where the first high ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state. , In the case of the second payout state, the noticeable effect (notice effect type) that can be executed is the same, but the determination ratio of each notice effect type may be different, and the payout state is low. In any of the cases of the ball state, the first high ball output state, and the second ball output state, the executable advance notice effect (notice effect type) and the determination ratio of each advance notice effect type are the same. There may be.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display, and an example is made in which the executeable notice effect type is different depending on the ball ejection state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a probability change suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot game is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game, or the jackpot game is up to 10 rounds during the jackpot game. It is possible to execute a continuation suggestion effect that suggests continuation in a plurality of effect types, and the ball ejection state is a low ball ejection state, the first high ball ejection state, and the second high ball ejection state. In some cases, the determination ratios of the effect types that can be executed and the effect types that can be executed as the probabilistic change suggestion effect and the continuous suggestion effect may be different.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 can display the hold display of the new hold storage generated by the start winning in a plurality of display patterns by executing the look-ahead notice setting process. The pre-reading notice effect can be executed, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit differs depending on which display pattern the hold display is displayed. Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-reading advance notice effect when the remaining number of variable displays after the determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (the hold display is normally white). Since it is displayed with a blank circle), when the pre-reading notice effect is executed for the reserved memory generated in the start winning in the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, the pre-reading is performed. To prevent the pre-reading notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the change of the ball output state to the low ball output state before the variable display based on the hold memory, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is started. It has become.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, when the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state or the second high ball ejection state, if the variable display remaining number after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number, the pre-reading notice effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state or the second high ball ejection state, the pre-reading notice effect is not uniquely executed. You may do so.

Although the feature portions of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention. Will be.

For example, in the feature unit 162SG, when the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period during the big hit game are longer than those when the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although adjustments have been made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time by prolonging the special figure variable display time of some fluctuation patterns. As a modification 162SG-1, when the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the determination rate of the probabilistic jackpot A is lowered as the jackpot type and the probability variable jackpot B is lower than the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state. You may increase the decision rate of. By doing so, when the ball ejection state is a high ball ejection state, it becomes easy to determine the probability variable jackpot B in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds as the jackpot type, and the probability variable jackpot A in which the number of lands is 10 rounds. Since it is difficult to determine, the number of prize balls to be paid out in one big hit game can be reduced, and as a result, adjustments can be made to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls in a high payout state.

Furthermore, as a modification 162SG-2, when the ball ejection state is a high ball ejection state, the probability variation jackpot (probability variation hit A, probability variation jackpot B, probability variation) is more important than when the ball ejection state is a low ball ejection state. By lowering the determination rate of the jackpot C) and increasing the determination rate of the non-probability variable jackpot, it may be easier to control the time saving state (low probability high base state) after the end of the jackpot game. By doing so, in the time saving state (low accuracy high base state), the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is lower than in the probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), and as a result, 100 times in the time saving state. By executing the variable display of, it becomes easier to determine the end of the consecutive villa state and it becomes easier to control to the normal state, so that the number of consecutive big hit games can be reduced through the high base state, so that it is high. It is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize ball in the ball ejection state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determination means" in the present invention is the processing of steps 162SGS190 to 162SGS194 (processing of determining the value of the time reduction counter and time reduction) in the special symbol stop processing shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 11-18. The part that executes the process of subtracting the value of the count counter, the process of determining the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction again, and the process of turning off the time reduction flag) corresponds to this.

Further, the CPU 103 of the feature unit 162SG changes the game state from the time saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low) based on the end of 100 variable displays after the end of the big hit game of the non-probability change big hit. Although the embodiment of controlling to the base state (base state), that is, ending the continuous villa state is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 has a high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base). In the state), a high-base state fall lottery (end lottery) is executed every time the variable display is started in the special symbol normal processing or every time the variable display is finished in the special symbol stop processing, and the lottery is performed. Based on the winning, the high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state) may be controlled to the low accuracy low base state, that is, the consecutive villa state may be terminated. Regarding the case where the fall lottery is executed every time the variable display is started or the variable display is finished, for example, when the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state. It suffices to make it easier to win the fall lottery at a higher rate than in the case. By doing so, it becomes easier to determine the end of the consecutive villa state in the high ball output state and it becomes easier to control the normal state, so that the number of consecutive big hit games generated through the high base state can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize ball in a high payout state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determination means" of the present invention is a process of executing a fall lottery when the CPU 103 starts variable display in the special symbol normal process or when the special symbol stop process is executed. , The process of turning off the probability change flag and the time saving flag when the fall lottery is won is applicable.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times, that is, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "0". The first high ball output state and the second high ball output state are changed to the low ball output state on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state. Although the mode to be controlled is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the ball-out state flag to "1". The value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of the jackpot game a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the period, that is, the "end condition" in the present invention is set to the "ball ejection state flag". After setting the value of to "1", the jackpot game may be executed a predetermined number of times during the period of the consecutive villa state. " By doing so, the CPU 103 has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), which is the number of times of execution of the big hit game executed after setting the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1". Therefore, the value of the ball ejection status flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times, that is, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "0". The first high ball output state and the second high ball output state are changed to the low ball output state on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state. Although the mode to be controlled is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the ball-out state flag to "1". The value of the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the total number of game balls that have won in each winning opening and the game balls that have entered the out opening has reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) during the period. That is, the number of game balls used for the game has reached a predetermined number during the period of the consecutive villa state after the "end condition" in the present invention is set to "the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to" 1 ". May be. By doing so, the CPU 103 outputs based on the fact that the number of game balls used for the game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) after the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1". The value of the ball state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" (first high ball ejection state) or "2" (second high ball ejection state), the special figure variable display in each fluctuation pattern is performed. An example is an example of performing an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of a prize ball in a high payout state by prolonging the time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depends on the value of the payout state flag. Therefore, adjustments may be made to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls in a high payout state by making the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 and 11-31 as a modification 162SG-5, the variation pattern for loss for when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (low ball ejection state). Judgment table A, deviation pattern judgment table B for when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" (first ball ejection state), the value of the ball ejection state flag is "2" (second ball ejection state) ), A variation pattern determination table C for loss is provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A, among the possible ranges 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination, 1 to 600 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. It is assigned to -1, 601 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B, among the possible ranges 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination, 1 to 400 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. It is assigned to -1, and 401 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C, among the possible ranges 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination, 1 to 200 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. It is assigned to -1, and 2001-700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

Here, when the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table B are compared, the ratio in which the deviation pattern determination table B determines the non-reach variation pattern more than the deviation pattern determination table A. On the other hand, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is determined is set high. That is, the deviation pattern determination table B is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern having a longer variable display time than the detachment variation pattern determination table A can be easily determined.

Further, when the deviation pattern determination table B and the deviation variation pattern determination table C are compared, the ratio of the non-reach variation pattern is determined in the deviation pattern determination table C is higher than that in the deviation pattern determination table B. On the other hand, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is determined is set high. That is, the deviation pattern determination table C is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern having a longer variable display time than the detachment variation pattern determination table B can be easily determined.

That is, in the deviation pattern determination table A, the deviation pattern determination table B, and the deviation variation pattern determination table C, the deviation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and the deviation pattern determination table. A has the shortest average variable display time.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-31, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" and the variable display result is out of order, the out-of-order variation pattern determination table A is selected and the variation pattern is selected. If the variable display result is out of alignment when the value of the payout status flag is "1", the outlier variation pattern determination table B is selected to determine the variation pattern, and the payout status flag is set. If the variable display result is out of alignment when the value is "2", the outlier variation pattern determination table B may be selected to determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the value of the payout state flag, it is possible to execute the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball in the high payout state.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the "advantageous state" in the present invention is set as the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled a specific number of times (five times in the feature unit 162SG) during the period of the consecutive villa state. Although the embodiment in which the value of the payout state flag is set from "0" to "1" is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in the present invention includes a small hit gaming state. But it may be. In particular, the present invention has the game property that the small hit game state can be frequently controlled during the period of the consecutive villa state, and the prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball to the large winning opening in these small hit game states. When applied to a machine (so-called small hit rush machine), the total number of times controlled to the big hit gaming state and the number of times controlled to the small hit gaming state during the period of the consecutive villa state is a specific number of times (for example, 100). By setting the value of the payout state flag from "0" to "1" based on the fact that the number of times has been reached, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize ball in the high payout state.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is executed repeatedly by the variable display 100 times after the jackpot game. The non-probability variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of time reduction controls executed after the jackpot game is completed is less than 100 (for example, 50 or 30). When a non-probable variable jackpot such as 50 or 30 times of time reduction control is provided in this way, the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1" or "2" (high ball ejection state). After the execution of the non-probability change jackpot game, when the variable display of the time reduction control number according to the non-probability change jackpot is executed, the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1". Even if it is not, the value of the ball ejection state flag may be set to "0". In other words, if the non-probability change jackpot is won in the consecutive villa state, and the jackpot is not won in the short time state after the end of the jackpot game of the non-probability change jackpot, and the normal state is reached, the normal state is reached. Originally, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball in the high payout state may be completed.

Further, the present specification discloses both a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of the feature section 109SG is applied and a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of the feature section 162SG is applied, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Both the invention of the feature portion 109 and the invention of the feature portion 162SG may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of 1.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a special state that is more likely to be controlled to the normal state and the advantageous state than the normal state. (For example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state)) (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, an update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13).
As shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, the adjusting means (for example, FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21) is adjusted so that the speed of giving the game value given in the unit period decreases when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the ball ejection state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball ejection state determination process to prolong the fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during the big hit game).
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 A part for executing the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the payout state specification command in the process of SGS17).
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
Moreover,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. A gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 95) can be mentioned.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment for lowering the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an excessive amount is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given and the gambling to be excessively increased, and it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game interest can be improved. .. Further, it is possible to more preferably execute the group production.

That is, when an adjustment for lowering the game value granting speed (for example, an adjustment for making the variable display time longer than when the game value granting speed is not lowered in the variable pattern selection) is executed, the adjustment is made. Since the effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the game from being given an excessive amount of game value in a short period of time, and at the same time, the player can perform the movable body effect when the pseudo-movable body display effect is executed. Since you will pay attention to the production in the expectation that it will be executed, you can improve the interest of the production. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily attract the interest of the player with appropriate gambling when installed in the gaming field and can improve the playing motivation of the player.

Further, the execution frequency of the character group notice may be different depending on the value of the numerical data. Doing so will improve your interest.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can draw the player attention to the execution of the pseudo-movable body display effect, it is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. A gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 95) can be mentioned. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example of the form.

(Example of other forms)

[Configuration of pachinko game machines, etc.]
12 and 13 are front views of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 12 and 13 show an arrangement layout of main members in the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of the gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is performed by variably displaying a special symbol. The "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

Two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also referred to as "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas. Update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumemu-chan, who appears in the production performed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yumemu-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko machine 1. Further, on the lower right game board 2 of the image display device 5, a character named Jam-chan, which appears in the production executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Yumemu-chan is the main character, it is the most important of all the characters, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters including Jam-chan. In addition, Jam is the most important character other than Yumemu-chan, who is the main character, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters other than Yumemu-chan. In addition, a character with a higher priority than other characters, such as Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, is a character that appears first in the scene where a character is selected, a character that is placed in the most prominent position, or a character that is fully selected. It may be the character located at the highest rank among them.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 19). The variable-sweep wing device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the second start winning opening is used. It becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as a closed state in which the second start winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 19), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (see FIG. 19). Hereinafter, it is usually referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A includes a gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 14) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A large winning opening door is provided in the space between the pachinko machines, and this large winning opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open and close the normal large winning opening with a gaming ball. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 19), the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the normal large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 19), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as V large). Form a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the route to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V-large winning opening is detected by the V-winning switch 24 (see FIG. 19) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V-winning area) provided inside the V-large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to the probable change state. That is, in this embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols is performed. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 12), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. The movable body 32 is configured such that the member with the letters "POWERFUL" is located on the front side of the member with the letters "2". As a result, the characters "POWERFUL2" are formed. "POWERFUL2" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation or the name of a singer). In addition, the characters attached to the movable body 32 are the names of the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the character with the next highest priority after the main character (for example, "Dream" indicating the main character Yumemu-chan. You may show a dream "). In this embodiment, the model name (powerful 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12 and a position overlying the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. .. Specifically, in the movable body 32, among the members with the letters "POWERFUL" and the members with the letters "2", only the members with the letters "POWERFUL" are shown in FIG. By falling from the position shown in FIG. 13, the image is stopped at a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or pressed) by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 19).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 19).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special LED board 9020 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the special figure LED board 9020, the type of the special symbol (first special figure) in the first special figure game and the special symbol in the second special figure game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 9020, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 9022 of the special figure 2.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are combined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 16 (b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 9054 of the special figure 2.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board provided above the game board 2. The lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V large winning opening are opened to win the V prize. A V lamp 9G that notifies that a round of possible jackpot gaming states is in progress and a V prize has occurred, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, and a stick controller 31A. The stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, the frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the frame right provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. It is equipped with a lamp 9R. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the letter "POWERFUL" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the accessory lamp 9A1 is behind the "P" and "O" portions, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is. The accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamps 9A4 are arranged on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the member with the letters "POWERFUL", so that the "POWERFUL" is lit (light-emitting).

The panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yumemu-chan) is drawn in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are the main characters. Is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the left side lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

As shown in FIG. 13, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. On the upper side of the game board 2, the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, respectively, divided into three areas, left, middle, and right. Has been done. The portion of the game board 2 provided with the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 is formed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, whereby the on-board lamps are formed. When the 9C1 to 9C13 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the upper portion of the game board 2, the upper portion of the game board 2 is lit (light-emitting) in white or red.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 marked with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V" lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (light emitting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (light emitting).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and by lighting (light emitting), the stick controller 31A is lit (light emitting). The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and by lighting (light emitting), the push button 31B is lit (light emitting).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 15) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The left side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 15) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The right side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chew lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K, the frame left lamp 9L, And the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 14 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 19).

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 19) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has twelve lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 in a counterclockwise direction from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has 11 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12 clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R emits light near the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the special LED substrate 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. As shown in FIG. 16A, the special figure LED board 9020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 showing a variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable display unit showing a variable display of the second special figure. 9022, a special figure 1 storage display unit 9023 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 storage display unit 9024 showing a second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. , The normal figure storage display unit 9025 showing the number of normal figure reserved storage, the normal figure display unit 9026 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, the right-handed display unit 9030 for urging the player to hit right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. A probability variation display unit 9028 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, a time reduction display unit 29 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 9027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit are provided. Each display unit may notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special figures or ordinary symbols, the result, the current gaming state, the number of pending numbers, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED board 9020 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display unit 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 9030 is lit (light-emitting), and the player is not urged to hit right. That is, when urging the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 9030 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 9030, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , The right-handed display / off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 9030 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 9030 only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 9030.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. It is to operate the hitting ball operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the left region of the gaming area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is present ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big winning opening) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path toward the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into.

In this embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second start winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 9030 urges the player to make a right-handed hit. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls is paid out. The right of the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is paid out by entering a game ball into a normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player can make a right-handed hit while the display prompting the right-handed is displayed. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probable change state. For this reason, the player may have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 16B, the fourth symbol unit 9050 has a special figure 1 storage display unit 9051 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure game corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 9052 showing the number of reserved storage, special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. A special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 and a right-handed display unit 9055 that urges the player to hit the right-hand side are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special diagram 1 variable display unit 9053. Also called. Further, the fact that the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 is also referred to as the variation display (variable display) of the second special symbol. Refer to.

Further, in this embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (lights up) and hits right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 9055 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the symbol changes due to the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After confirmation, the right-handed display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 9055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 9055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 17 is a view looking through between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized. ..

FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays an image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern or a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is used. Etc.) are variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold storage display area 5D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays A displayable second hold storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the special symbol and the fourth symbol 5J indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are displayed. At the left end of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol 5M having a size smaller than that of each decorative symbol is displayed. The small symbols are displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols are arranged vertically. Further, the small symbol 5M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 18, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 5M has a size smaller than the decorative symbol at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5. Have been placed. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is a quadrangle or a substantially quadrangle, but as described above, the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. It is fixed so as to cover it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part (particularly the end) of the screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the gaming board 2. It has become.

[Board configuration]
FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric parts including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later) and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special figure LED board 9020 and the like, solenoid drive signals). Consists of including.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, a V winning switch 24) for detecting a game ball. A detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on, etc.) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) assigns an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of the progress of the game]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special drawing game by the special drawing 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special drawing LED board 9020 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special drawing game by the special drawing 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special drawing LED board 9020 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, which will be described later). The actual design differs depending on the type of big hit.) When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to) is used, it becomes a "big hit". It should be noted that the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020. Is also referred to as a "specific display result". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol. ) Corresponds to the combination of lighting modes, it becomes a "small hit". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol. When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the symbol) is used, it becomes "missing". It should be noted that, in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020, a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is used. The lighting mode corresponding to the symbol) is also referred to as a “loss display result”.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state. In addition, it is not always necessary to provide a small hit as a hit type.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is either the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until early timing. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type that can hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state for some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, and the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be turned off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach, super reach with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach, and strongest reach with higher jackpot reliability than super reach. Also, in Super Reach, it is divided into the first half of Super Reach and the second half of Super Reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the normal reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived with the strongest reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In the following, "super reach" is also referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is also referred to as "first half of SP", and "second half of super reach" is also referred to as "second half of SP".

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (the above-mentioned specific display result), it is predetermined as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol that is a combination of big hits is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "small hit", a predetermined small hit combination is obtained as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol (for example, "1 3 5") is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "small hit"). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit" of some big hit types (a big hit type in a big hit game state similar to the small hit game state), and when it becomes a "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "loss" (the above-mentioned loss display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, but the variable display of the decorative symbol. As a display result of, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "non-reach loss") of the non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is pseudo-like a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Various tables related to big hits]
Various tables related to big hits will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

(Hit type)
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a hit type. As shown in FIG. 20, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of three rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 1, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 6 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 6, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 7 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 7 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 7, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpots 8 and 9, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(Each random number)
FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 21, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random 1 is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random 1 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to its upper limit of 65536, and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and random 4 are random counters (for determining the post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns. Post-variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation in the special symbol. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss. For example, it is updated one by one, added and updated from 1, and added and updated up to the upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Will be updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit. For example, it is added and updated from 1 to 1 and is added and updated up to its upper limit of 239, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the pre-variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a pre-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns. The pre-variation refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the special symbol. Random 5 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 251 and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 6 is, for example, incremented and updated from 1 to 1, incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 201, and then incremented and updated from 1 again.

In this embodiment, whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). Then, which of the plurality of types of jackpots is to be selected is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 2.

First, the posterior variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random number for determining the posterior variation pattern (random 3 and 4), and the anterior variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the anterior variation pattern (random 5). Will be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 22A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 22 (a), and in the probability change jackpot determination table, the lower column of FIG. 22 (a). The jackpot judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time, and the jackpot judgment value peculiar to the probability change is added to the normal time. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 22A shows the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit or the probability (ratio) of becoming a loss.

22 (b) and 22 (c) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 22B is a first special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when the big hit is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when the big hit is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure big hit type determination table of FIG. 22 (b), the numerical values are compared with the random 2 values for the big hit type determination, and correspond to the normal big hits 1 and 2 and the probable variable big hits 1 to 4, respectively. Judgment values are set for the number of determined judgment values. For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned 100 random 2s. 25 of the random 2 values are assigned, the probability variation jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 5 random 2 out of 100 random 2 and the probability variation jackpot 2 is 37 of the 100 random 2 Random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 4 is 4 random 2 out of 100 random 2s. The value of is assigned.

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 22 (c), the determination values are set by the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probabilistic jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the values of random 2. Has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (c), for the second special figure, the probability variation jackpot 5 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variation jackpot 6 is 100 random 2s. 5 random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 8 is 70 out of 100 random 2s. The value of each random 2 is assigned, and the probability variation jackpot 9 is assigned the value of 10 random 2 out of 100 random 2.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 2 values match as the jackpot type, and the random 2 values match as the jackpot symbol. Determine the big hit design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

[Direction control command]
FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 which is the control board on the main side transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 23 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (pre-variation pattern) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The pre-variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of pre-variation patterns, there is a pre-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the pre-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the posterior variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The rear variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variation jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variation jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variation jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variation jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 5 is determined. The command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variation jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variation jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variation jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variation jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 9 is determined. Each of the loss designation command, the normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and the probability variation jackpot 1 to 9 designation command, or these are collectively referred to as an 8C system command.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command that specifies the initialization (designates to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the recovery of the power failure (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probabilistic state specification command for designating the background of the probabilistic state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95-series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 2. The command A003 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 1. The command A004 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 4 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 2. The command A005 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 5 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 6 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 4. The command A007 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 7 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 5. The command A008 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 8 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 6. The command A009 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 9 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 7. The command A010 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 10 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 8. The command A011 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 11 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closure of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 2. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 1. The command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 2. The command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 3. The command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 4. The command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 5. The command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 6. The command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 7. The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 8. The command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command for designating that a V prize has occurred. The probability change determination device pass designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

The command B100 (H) is a first start winning prize designation command for designating that there was a first start winning prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the jackpot determination, the jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type are in the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to send the data to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value for designating a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[Variation pattern]
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main side. Each variation pattern is managed by the main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern corresponding to the post-variation. It is designed to include. The pre-variation pattern corresponds to the pre-variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 23, and the post-variation pattern corresponds to the post-variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. Corresponds to.

(Pre-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which the pre-variation numbers are assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Is. The pre-variation number 2 is a pre-variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ×) (a reach in which the movable body 32 does not operate in the reach mode). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ○) (reach in which the movable body 32 operates in the reach mode). The pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (reach that becomes a reach mode and develops into a final reach).

The pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after one pseudo-variation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative symbol until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Variable display (variable display). The effect of repeating such pseudo-variations is also called pseudo-ream. By executing the pseudo-ream, the variable display based on one hold memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The variable display that is temporarily stopped and then restarted is also referred to as "re-variable display". The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (role ○) is executed after one pseudo-variation. The pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after performing the pseudo-variation twice. The pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (role ○) is executed after performing the pseudo-variation twice. The pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo-variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the pre-variation patterns, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting the moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1246. Further, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1861.

(Post-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of posterior variation patterns to which the posterior variation numbers are assigned, the posterior variation number 1 is a posterior variation pattern command (8400 (H)) for designating a 13-second variation. The post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401 (H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. The post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402 (H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. The post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403 (H)) that specifies that the pseudo-continuous gassing is executed. Pseudo-ren Gase is an effect that pretends to execute pseudo-ren and does not execute pseudo-ren in the end.

The post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach). The post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the latter half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (variation of a decorative symbol that becomes a reach mode and becomes a hit mode). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that specifies the first half (hit) of the SP (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes the hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A (H)) that specifies the latter half of the SP (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B (H)) that specifies the final reach (hit) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes the hit mode in the final reach).

(Judgment of post-variation pattern)
The post-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters in the jackpot determination depending on whether it is determined to be a jackpot or a loss. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. As shown in FIG. 26, when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 3 described with reference to FIG. 21. Further, when the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved storages after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the number of reserved storages after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined as the post-variation pattern. A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 1, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 3, one of the post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

In this way, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion, and further, the post-variation number is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of fluctuation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, which makes it possible to give variety to the game and improve the fun of the game.

FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 27, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 4 described with reference to FIG. 21. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of determination values according to the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), when it is determined to be one of the normal jackpot 1, 2 and the probabilistic jackpot 1, 2, 5 to 8, any of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12. The posterior variation pattern is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When it is determined to be one of the probabilistic jackpots 3 and 9, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. .. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of variation pattern changes according to the type of jackpot, thereby giving diversity to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 at the time of loss, whereas it is a big hit. Since the time is about 1 / 1.1, which is higher than that, when the SP reach or the final reach is developed, the player can be expected to have a big hit.

(Judgment of pre-variation pattern)
FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining a pre-variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined. Further, the pre-variation number determined is also different depending on the type of the post-variation pattern determined earlier.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 1 is determined, the posterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28B, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 2 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28 (c), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 3 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28 (d), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 4 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 28 (e), when it is determined to be the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 5 and 9, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 4 and 7. As shown in FIG. 28 (f), when the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of any of the anterior variation numbers 4, 7 and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28 (g), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 7 is determined, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 5, 8 and 11.

As shown in FIG. 28 (h), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 11 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11 of the anterior variation number 5. As shown in FIG. 28 (i), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 8 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9 and 12 of the anterior variation number 6. As shown in FIG. 28 (j), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 12 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9, and 12.

(Total variation pattern)
FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the variation pattern is one of the main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. Further, on the sub side as well, the fluctuation patterns of the sub fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 are defined so as to correspond to each of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26.

[Each notice production]
FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table in each notice effect. In this embodiment, a notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol may be executed. The notice effect is also an effect that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a big hit, and is also an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. The advance notice effect includes a group advance notice effect (also referred to as a group advance notice or a group effect) and an SP first half title advance notice effect (also referred to as an SP first half title advance notice).

The group notice effect is an effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of objects progress as a group. Multiple objects include any moving object, such as a character such as a person, fish or animal, or a machine such as an airplane or car. The object such as a character may be of one type or may be of a plurality of types. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of group notice effects are provided. Specifically, a 6-person group notice in which 6 characters dressed as maids progress in a group, a Baku Chu group notice in which a mouse character with a body of a bomb named Baku Chu progresses in a group, A Boingo group notice can be executed in which a character named Boingo progresses as a group.

In this embodiment, whether or not the group notice effect is executed by the group notice lottery when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8, 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. Or, the type of group notice effect to be performed is determined.

FIG. 31A shows a lottery table for executing a group notice lottery in stage A. In this embodiment, even if variable display is performed based on the same fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of stages having different production modes (background image, BGM, sound effect, appearing character, etc.) are provided. .. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the stage A is a stage in which a character named Yumemu-chan, which is included in the six characters dressed as maids, is directed.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 15%, and 6 of them have a probability of 13%. It will be decided as a group notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 85%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 55%, and 30%. It is decided to announce the Boingo group with the probability of.

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320 and the probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, the variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss The probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 15%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of becoming a big hit is about 1/320 and the probability of being determined by the posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 is about 1 / 1.1, the variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. The probability of being determined by the posterior variation pattern is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 85%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of hitting is about 0.27%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 64%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 64%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

FIG. 31B shows a lottery table for executing a group notice lottery in stage B. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the stage B is a stage in which a character called Baku Chu is performed.

As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 10%, and the explosion is performed with a probability of 8%. It will be decided as a Chu group notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 90%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 60%, and 30 It is decided to be a Boingo group notice with a probability of%.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.10%. On the other hand, the probability that the variation pattern after the variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined at the time of hit is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 90%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of hitting is about 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 74%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 74%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

The SP first half title notice is an effect suggesting that when the SP reach is developed, it will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the character image showing the title of the first half of the SP reach. In this embodiment, the display of the character image of the SP first half title is executed in both the stage A and the stage B, but the advance notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title is the case of the stage B. Is only executed. Even in the case of stage A, a notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the title in the first half of the SP may be executed.

In this embodiment, whether or not the SP first half title notice is executed in the SP first half title notice lottery when the post-variation number 6 to 12 post-variation pattern that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. , And the type of SP first half title notice to be executed is determined.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the posterior variation number 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the SP first half title notice is executed with a probability of 20%, and the posterior variation number corresponding to the hit. If the post-variation pattern of 10 to 12 is determined, there is an 80% probability that the SP first half title notice will be executed.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 20%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of loss is about 0.20%. On the other hand, the probability that the variation pattern after the variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined at the time of hit is about 1/320. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 80%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of hitting is about 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the SP first half title notice is executed is about 56%. The reliability (expectation) of the title notice in the first half of the SP is not limited to 56%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

In this way, the reliability (expectation of big hit) in the group notice is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability in the SP first half title notice (in the case of big hit). Expectation) is 56%, and the group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice. Therefore, when the group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title notice is executed, and the player is executed the group notice rather than the SP first half title notice. I have come to expect.

In addition, the boingo group notice in stage A is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed, it is executed. , Almost likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit, so even if the 6-person group notice is executed, it is lost. The probability of being is greater than the Boingo group notice. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed, and the player is executed the Boingo group notice rather than the 6-person group notice. I have come to expect.

Similarly, the boingo group notice in stage B is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed. Is likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu group notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit, so the Baku Chu group notice is executed. The possibility of losing is greater than the Baku Chu Mondai notice. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Baku Chu group notice is executed, and the player is executed the Boingo group notice rather than the Baku Chu group notice. I have come to expect that.

Furthermore, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, and is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit. For this reason, the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B is executed at a higher rate than the 6-person group notice in stage A at the time of a big hit. As a result, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A, and the player has 6 more than the 6-person group notice. We are now expecting the crowd announcement to be carried out.

The reliability of the group notice in stage A and the reliability of the group notice in stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group notice in stage A and the group notice in stage B need to be more reliable than the SP first half title notice, and the boingo group notice is higher than the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice. It suffices if the reliability is high.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 makes necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the gaming control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the recovery process (step S4) and then the setting confirmation process (step S5). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the game is stopped, which is different from the lost symbol. It suffices to control so that the display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like. Turn off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, a pressing operation of the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. The setting change process of step S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted. (Step S10). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 starts the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined information output process. Data such as information (information indicating the number of start winnings) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state has been reached) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal diagram game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal figure display unit 9026, and the normal figure holding number is displayed by turning on the normal figure storage display unit 9025.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 33. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 9022 stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 34. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (Step S51). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52). It is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B (step). S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing any of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step S58). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 uses the random number value random 1 for jackpot determination and the jackpot type determination among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value random 2 and the random number value random 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random values random 1 to random 4 is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit (not shown), while the start port buffer value is "2". At a certain time, numerical data indicating random value random 1 to random 4 is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit (not shown).

For the numerical data indicating the random value random 1 for determining the jackpot and the random value random 2 for determining the jackpot type, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result is "". It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". Random random values 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step S59, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for sending the first start winning prize designation command is made to. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is seconded. 2 Make settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start prize designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process process is completed. NS.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the hold storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start opening buffer, initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 36, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information (step S1001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step S1002). If a predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area is "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step S1004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating "second" (that is, the data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (first). 1 Set the data indicating "first" in the flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage becomes the second. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command of the side indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step S1009). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 21) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability changing state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, when the number of jackpot judgment values is probable, the jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical value in the lower column of FIG. 22A is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are set in advance. A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value in the upper column of FIG. 22A is set), which is set less than the jackpot determination table, is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic big hit determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in a state or a time-saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 22 (a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the gaming state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) and the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier of the conditions is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 22 (b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 22 (c) are used. Select one of the judgment tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 22 (b). Further, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 22 (c) when the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the jackpot type extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and stores the random number for determining the jackpot type in the reserved storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determining table. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 37, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the post-variation pattern based on random 3 and 4 according to the number of reserved storages and the presence / absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 26 according to the number of reserved storages, and after the selection, the post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 3 are used later. Determine the variation pattern. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 according to the type of the big hit, and determines the post-variation pattern based on the selected post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the pre-variation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the pre-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 28 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and pre-variates based on the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 5. Determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (pre-variation pattern and post-variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop process (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022. Control for derivation display is performed (step S1301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 9021 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the change of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 is terminated. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROМ101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and between rounds are set for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal big hit of 3R, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning opening in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot of 5R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and the V large winning opening is opened at the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a probability variation jackpot of 10R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V large winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. .. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the image display device 5 that a big hit has occurred), which is the big hit display time, is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S1307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set (step S1309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has ended, and the time reduction flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the reduced working hours state, the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the non-reduced working hours state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step S1311 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating that the probability change state is set is set (step S1313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability change flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the reduced working hours state to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (step S1315), and in step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1316), and the processing is terminated.

(Pre-processing for opening big hits)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 40, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during the opening of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 41, in the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step S1503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change determination flag is set (step S1506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability change determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability change determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 83 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 42, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604). End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the open number counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step S1605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round in which the V-large winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V-opening round), that is, the next round is the V-opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), the solenoid 83 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 43, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning region is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the probability change determination flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step S1707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set in step S1705 (step S1705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game state is the probability change, the time saving, or the normal game state by the probability change state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Main processing of production control)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 44 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. The effect control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. As shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S7103).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the loss symbol determination data table to determine the display result of the loss that does not reach as the final stop of the effect symbol (step). S7105), the process proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), a stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (step S7104), and step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, when it is not decided to make a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is decided to make a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 configures a combination of big hit symbols according to the type of big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for performing the process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, the group notice setting process), the process proceeds to step S7107.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol variation control is performed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the effect symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the fluctuation display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream effect, and the effect display operation in the advance notice effect are stored as multiple types of symbol variation control patterns. Has been done.

Further, each symbol variation control pattern is used for displaying variation of the effect symbol such as the effect control process timer setting value, the effect control process timer determination value, the effect display control data, the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the end code. It includes control data for controlling various effect operations according to the situation, and the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in time series.

Next, the process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process of step S7109, the effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, etc.) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data). Then, the control of the speakers 8L, 8R) as the effect component is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, the image display device 5 outputs a command to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice setting process. The group notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing the group advance notice has been received (step S7061). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 issues a variation pattern command including a posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss, and a variation pattern including a posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. Determine if a command has been received. The variation pattern including the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation numbers 6 to 8 is the variation pattern of the main variation numbers 8 to 15, and the variation pattern including the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 is the main variation number 18. It is a fluctuation pattern of ~ 26.

When the effect control CPU 120 has not received the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (Y in step S7061), the effect control CPU 120 converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 22, since the pre-variation time is 41500 msec, the number of frames is about 1246, and since the post-variation time is 91900 msec, the number of frames is about 3000. Further, for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26, since the pre-variation time is 62000 msec, the number of frames is about 1861, and since the post-variation time is 142,800 msec, the number of frames is about 4288. ..

The effect control CPU 120 executes a group notice lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the group notice lottery table shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b) to determine whether or not to execute the group notice based on the post-variation number, and to execute the group notice. Determine the type of.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group has won the advance notice lottery. If the effect control CPU 120 is not won in the group notice lottery (N in step S7064), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the group advance notice lottery (Y in step S7064), the effect control pattern for executing the group advance notice according to the stage is extracted (step S7065), and the process ends.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 985th frame among the 1246 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22, and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 1385th frame out of the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 1600th frame among the 1861 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26 and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 2000th frame among the 4288 frames in the post-variation.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group notice is executed in the pre-variation, whereas in the case of stage B, the group notice is executed in the post-variation. There is.

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice execution process. The group advance notice execution process is a process included in the variable display during effect process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the effect control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 is set, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

When the effect control pattern for executing the group advance notice is not set (N in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control pattern for executing the group notice is set (Y in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the frame of the group notice execution timing has been reached (S7203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of the stage A.

When the effect control CPU 120 has not reached the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (N in step S7203), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 reaches the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (Y in step S7203), the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices to execute the group notice (step S7204). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or turn off the game effect lamp 9 based on the group notice lighting table shown in FIGS. 63 to 69, which will be described later, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L. Controls to output sound. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of the progress of the game]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first hits the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the area on the left side of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 4. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that urges the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow directed to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handedness are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 9030 of the special figure LED board 9020 and the right-handed display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 also prompt right-handed by lighting a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning openings are opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a normal big hit of 3R and 10 times in the case of a probable big hit of 10R). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced working hours state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V prize is generated during the big hit round, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled in the time saving state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special map fluctuation time (period in which the special map is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal map is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened is increased, so that the frequency at which the game ball enters the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As described above, there are 5 to 9 probabilistic jackpots as the types of jackpots in the second special figure game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055 has continued from the time of the first hit.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced time state and the probable change state (high probability high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probable change state or time saving state after the big hit round is finished, and the player will be in the probable change state or time saving after the big hit round per continuous chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probable change state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055 is also completed. As a result, the player will launch the game ball toward the first flow path through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

[Design of group notice production]
Next, the design of the group notice effect in the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice work process. As shown in FIG. 49, the work process of the group notice consists of a summary document creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), this video production process (step S903), and an authoring process in the order of the work. (Step S904), sound creation process (step S905), lottery incorporating process (step S906), video incorporating process (step S907), sound incorporating process (step S908), and lamp data. The production step (step S909) and the lamp incorporating step (step S910) are included.

In the process of creating the summary document in step S901, a summary document for newly designing the group notice is created in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the animation production process of step S902, the storyboard of the animation used in the group notice is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V-conte is created as a script for creating the animation, and the CG for the animation is created. Production and actual animation production are performed.

In the main video production process of step S903, the video data used in the group notice is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group notice is created in this video production process, but the reproduction time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group notice actually executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Created longer. As a result, even if the execution time of the group notice becomes long due to the design change, the video data created in this video production process can be used as it is without being changed. Further, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each production. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 985th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 1385th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from. Further, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 1600th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 2000th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from.

In the authoring step of step S904, software (program) for video reproduction executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created using the video data created in the video production step.

In the sound creation step of step S905, data of various sounds such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group notice are created in accordance with the video of the group notice.

In the process of incorporating the lottery in step S906, data about various lottery related to the group notice such as the group notice lottery is created. In the process of incorporating the lottery, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the group notice is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as software for lottery executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding step of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software executed by the group notice.

In the sound incorporating step of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creating step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed by the group notice.

In the lamp data creation step of step S908, various lighting data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing in the lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in the group notice are created.

In the process of incorporating the lamp in step S910, various data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation process are used as software for lamp reproduction executed in pachinko game 1. It is incorporated in the game machine 1.

Through the work in each of these steps, lottery, video, sound data, and the like related to the group notice effect are created and incorporated as software so as to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(This video production)
The main video production process of the group notice will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. 50 to 53 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 50, first, in STEP 1, a character image used in the group notice is prepared. For example, in the group notice, the main character Yumemu-chan is used, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to show the mode in which Yumemu-chan runs. It should be noted that such a character image is created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP2, using the moving image creation tool, a moving image in which the character steps on the four character images g1 to g4 is created. For example, when the moving image creation tool is started, the timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or a plurality of layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. Each layer is arranged in numerical order such as layers 1, 2, 3 ... from the top, and the more the layers are arranged on the top (that is, the younger the number), the more the image is on the back side on the screen of the image display device 5. It is designed to be located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to the values desired by the user.

In STEP2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a predetermined layer column. For example, in the example shown in (a), the character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to the layer 1 to form the moving image data A1 to A4. According to the moving image data A1 to A4, it is a stepping motion of a pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

If the set of the moving image data A1 to A4 for stepping created as described above is repeatedly arranged on the timeline, the moving image for the character to step on is repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this way, the stepping motion is created for the other characters by the same work.

As shown in FIG. 51, in STEP3, a moving image in which the character progresses is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X-axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY-axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. In both the X-axis and the Y-axis, the value corresponding to the center position is 0. Therefore, the screen size is −400 ≦ X ≦ 400 and −320 ≦ Y ≦ 320.

By using the setting screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width at which the video data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), one cycle of the stepping moving image data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and the pattern is linearly moved on the X axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500. Is set to.

As shown in FIG. 52, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters progress is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), moving image data in which the character Jam-chan used for the group notice moves linearly on the X-axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created by the same creation procedure.

As described above, when moving image data that linearly moves on the X axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created for a plurality of characters, the moving image data of each character is placed on different layers as shown in (b). Deploy. Also, if the time axis is shifted between the characters, the timing of appearance can be shifted. Further, if the position of the Y-axis is shifted between the characters, the position on the Y-axis in which the character appears can be shifted. The Z axis is an axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen are input. It is possible to design the effect of the group notice (Boingo group notice of this embodiment) so that the character moves between the side and the side.

As shown in FIG. 53, in STEP 5, a moving image of the group notice is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), by arranging the moving image data of six types of characters such as characters A to F on the timeline of the layer, the moving image of the group notice is completed.

Further, if the length of the moving image data on the timeline is changed, the animation itself changes the speed at which the character moves while maintaining the moving image in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles. Can be done. For example, the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 10 is the moving image data in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles, like the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 9. , The length on the timeline in the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline in the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 9. As a result, the character C arranged on the layer 10 advances on the screen at a faster speed than the character C arranged on the layer 9 while maintaining the same animation as the character C arranged on the layer 9. ..

In the 6-person group notice, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen. For example, also in the example shown in FIG. 53A, moving image data of a plurality of characters are not arranged on the timeline at the same timing and at the same length.

Further, as shown in (b), if the moving image data of sand smoke is arranged on the layer 1 located on the backmost side, the moving image of sand smoke can be combined with the moving image in which a plurality of characters progress.

As described above, it is possible to create moving image data of a group notice in which a plurality of characters progress. In the actual creation of the video data of the group notice, it is assumed that the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 covers the screen. The video data of the group notice is created with the area corresponding to the position covered with a mask. Further, the group notice moving image data is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that the screen can be applied to a size larger than a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches) (for example, 20 inches).

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an overall picture of the 6-person group notice. As shown in FIG. 54, in the 6-person group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which 6 characters such as maid A to maid F progress as a group is displayed. The group notice effect is not limited to the six characters, but the appearance of a plurality of each character makes it possible to display the largest number of characters among the effects that can be performed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Maid A to Maid F all wear the same or substantially the same maid clothes, it is difficult to distinguish the type of character other than recognizing by face. In this embodiment, the design of the apron worn by each character is different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the difference at first glance. Maid A is Yume-chan, who is the main character, and Maid B is Jam-chan, who is the next highest priority character of Yume-chan, who is the main character.

In the 6-person group notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, face or foot) does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 6 maids A (Yumemu-chan) will appear, but 5 of them have visible faces. That is, the face of one of the six maids A appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids B (Jam-chan) will appear, but 4 of them have visible faces. That is, the face of one of the five maids B appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids C will appear, of which 3 maids C can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid C do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids D will appear, of which 3 maids D can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid D do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids E will appear, of which 3 maids E can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid E do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids F will appear, of which 3 maids F can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid F do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice effect are the character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and the character in which a part of the whole body (for example, the face) does not fit in the display area of the screen. This includes a character in which other parts of the whole body (for example, a part other than the face) are displayed within the display area of the screen.

In addition, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice production are characters of low importance in the contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as maids C to F, and maid A (Yumemu-chan) and maid B (jam-chan). Including characters that are more important than maids C to F in the contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1, maids A and B have a whole body that does not fit in the display area of the screen as compared to maids C to F. The proportion of parts other than the face that fit in the display area of the screen and are displayed is low. That is, the maid A and the maid B are designed to have a higher proportion of appearances while showing their faces than the maids C to F.

(Auxiliary display)
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the auxiliary display used in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 55, in the group notice effect, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the character is progressing. In this embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as an auxiliary display. Displaying an image of sand smoke near the character, more effectively following the progressing character, can make the player feel as if the character's progress is causing sand smoke, and so on. It is possible to emphasize the mode in which the character runs through. As shown in FIG. 53 (b) described above, the image of sand smoke, which is an auxiliary display, is arranged on the layer 1 located on the rearmost side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55, the image of sand smoke is located on the back side of any of the appearing characters.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55, since the layer on which the image of maid E is placed is on the front side of the layer on which the image of maid C is placed, the image of maid E is from the image of maid C. Is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the image of the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is located on the back side of both the image of the maid E and the image of the maid C.

In this way, when the display of the maid E and the display of the maid C overlap, the display of the maid E has priority over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is used. When the display of the maid C overlaps with the display of the maid C, the display of the maid C has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E.

(Motion blur processing)
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the motion blur process used in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 56, in the group notice effect, motion blur processing is applied to the progressing character. Motion blur processing is a process for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character). By performing motion blur processing on the display of a progressing character, an afterimage of the character is displayed after the progressing character. It will be displayed. This makes it possible to create a dynamic group notice effect. Further, when the image obtained by the motion blur processing for one character overlaps with the image obtained by the motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for the one character is performed so as not to impair the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspect of contour when characters overlap)
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining an aspect of contours when characters overlap in a group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 57, in the group notice effect, one character may overtake another character. At that time, when the display of the character to be overtaken and the display of the other character overlap, the outline of the character to be overtaken is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), it is shown that the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker and Maid B is highlighted more than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid F overtakes the maid F. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid F, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid F.

Further, in the example shown in (b), it is shown that the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker and Maid B is highlighted more than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid D overtakes the maid D. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid D, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid D.

When one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to thickening the outline of one character, but the size of one character may be increased or the brightness of one character may be higher than the brightness of another character. It may be displayed with one character emphasized more than the other characters by increasing the height or making the contrast of one character clearer than the contrast of the other characters.

(Display on the screen of the image display device)
FIG. 58 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during the execution of the group notice effect. As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57 described above, since the gaming board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. Of the edges, the portion covered by the game board 2 is invisible. However, as shown in FIG. 58, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized.

Here, in FIG. 58, as shown in (a), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, but a part of the maid A (this example). Then, from the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, as shown in (b), the entire maid A displayed first is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is the first. The second, which is displayed more than the situation, and the whole of the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not displayed yet, while a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) is displayed. It has been shown that the situation will be. Further, the first displayed character (maid A) and the second displayed character (maid B) have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is visually recognized with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display are displayed. This occurs regardless of whether the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking through the device 5. That is, FIG. 58 is a case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 18B, the game board 2 is an image display device. Even if the edge of the screen of 5 is covered, the whole maid A (Yumemu-chan) who is the main character is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, but a part of the maid A (this example). Then, from the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, the whole of the first displayed maid A is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than the first situation, and 2 The second situation is that while the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

(Overview of Baku Chu Mondai Notice)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the whole picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. As shown in FIG. 59, in the Baku Chu group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which characters such as Baku Chu progress as a group is displayed.

In the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) may not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and may protrude. In some cases.

As described above, in the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the moving image data of the Baku Chu Mondai notice is created by arranging the image of the animation in which one kind of character moves on the screen. The moving image data in the Baku Chu Mondai notice is also created based on the work process shown in FIGS. 49 to 53 by the same method as the moving image data in the 6-person group notice.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group notice production)
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a luminance data table in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 60, the group notice production (6 person group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo group notice) includes the first display period (1000 msec), the second display period (1310 msec), and the third display period (830 msec). It is divided into.

The first display period is a period from the first start of the character display in the group notice effect to the first end of the character display. More specifically, the first display period is a period from the first appearance of any character in the group notice effect to the first disappearance of any character. For example, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character progresses at the top as it is, the period until the one character disappears is the first display period. Alternatively, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character is overtaken by another character, the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen is the first display period. .. In this embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the second displayed character ends before the display of the first displayed character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, the first character is overtaken by the second appearing character, and the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which the state in which the display of the new character starts and ends continues. More specifically, in the second display period, after any character disappears first in the group notice effect, a state in which new characters appear one after another continues, and the last character appears. It is the period until it appears. The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Further, in the second display period, the number of characters appearing is larger than in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period in which the display of the character ends without starting the display of the new character. More specifically, the third display period is a period from the appearance of the last character in the group notice effect to the disappearance of all the characters. The character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, and may be a character that is omitted by the character that appears last. The third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the effect sound of the effect sound is started in the first display period. The volume is raised to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59, with respect to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, the volume is the minimum (for example, mute or the lowest volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases gradually. It reaches the specified value and is maintained at the specified value (for example, set volume or maximum volume) thereafter. Even in the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. After that, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at a specified value, and then gradually decreases to the minimum.

It should be noted that the stepwise increase in volume from the minimum to the specified value in the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Further, the process in which the volume gradually decreases from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period is referred to as volume fade-out. In this embodiment, the fade-in time from the output of the effect sound in the first display period to the increase in the volume of the effect sound from the minimum to the specified value decreases the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from the beginning to the minimum volume of the effect sound.

The luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means are frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric. Includes game effect lamps such as Chu Lamp 9H, Stick Controller Lamp 9J, and Trigger Button Lamp 9K. The luminance data table includes a first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period, a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. .. That is, in the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinks, or turned off based on the brightness data included in the first brightness data table, and is included in the second brightness data table in the second display period. The predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinked, or turned off based on the brightness data, and in the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinked, or turned off based on the brightness data included in the third brightness data table. Or turn off.

(Timing of 6-person notice at stage A)
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the occurrence timing of the 6-person group notice in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the 6-person group notice is executed from the 1600th frame during the pre-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The 6-person group notice starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In the 2984 frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the latter half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames) (2331th frame). The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26, which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half of the total variation time (6149 frames) (about 3074th frame) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). (The second half).

In this embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result, the first display period of the 6-person notice is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. .. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or in the final reach, from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the 6-person group notice may be started in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the occurrence timing of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in the stage B. As described above, in stage B, the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 62, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The announcement of the Baku Chu Mondai will start from the 66600msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In the 2984 frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the latter half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th ram) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frame) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frame). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). Timing (second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the latter half of the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 26 which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed is close to half (about 3074th frame) of the total variation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). Timing (second half).

In this embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. No. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or in the final reach, from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice within the predetermined period may be configured to start.

[Brightness data]
With reference to FIGS. 63 to 87, the luminance data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 controls various lighting means in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. These luminance data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light emitting) portion of the game effect lamp according to the display in the group notice based on the luminance data stored in the luminance data table. In this embodiment, the lit place literally refers to a lit place, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the lit place is referred to as a lit place, and other lamps. The place where the lamp that is not lit (that is, the lamp that is off) is located is not called the lit place. In another example, the lighting location refers to a portion that is lit with high brightness, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that is lit with high brightness is located is lit. The place where the lamp lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the lit place is located may not be called the lit place.

More specifically, the data (also referred to as an element) for turning on or off the lamp is defined by the luminance data table, and in such a luminance data table, in the data storage area referred to by a specific lamp. If 0 data (for example, "000" data corresponding to RGB) is stored, the specific lamp is turned off. Further, when the data storage area referred to by the specific lamp does not exist in the luminance data table, or the luminance data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a luminance data table referenced by a specific lamp, and one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB are stored in the data storage area referenced by the specific lamp. If is stored, the specific lamp is lit. For example, when a specific effect such as a big hit notice effect is executed at the time of an effect corresponding to a normal background, the specific lamp is referred to in the specific effect. Even if the data of a specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table, if the data of a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table referred to in the effect corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp is lit. Will be done.

(Parent table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 63, in the parent table in the group warning brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the group notice effect is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 3140 msec so as to match the group notice effect.

(Child table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 64, in the child table in the group advance notice brightness data table, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 96 to 97 and 152 to 154 described later) in the period in which the group notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is about W1 and the accessory lamp 9A is about. A grandchild table of Y1, L1 for the left lamp 9B, U1 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG. 60.

In the second display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 98, 99, 155, and 156, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W2, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y2. A grandchild table of L2 for the left panel lamp 9B, U2 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A2 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG. 60.

Of the period in which the group notice effect is executed, in the third display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 100, 101, 157, and 158 described later), the frame lamp is W3, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y3. A grandchild table of L3 for the left panel lamp 9B, U3 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A3 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 64, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the group notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the combination in any of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Six types of brightness data tables are provided: an object lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp.

The V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect (for example, near the appearance of the character in the group notice effect), but since it is not used in the group notice effect, its grandchild table Is not prepared. Since the V lamp 9G is a lamp that notifies that a round of a jackpot game state in which a V prize can be generated is in progress or that a V prize has occurred, or a lamp that notifies that a jackpot has occurred, in the group notice production. If it lights up, it will be misunderstood that the player is winning a V or winning a big hit, and in order to avoid such inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is used in the group notice production. Not. The V lamp 9G may be provided at another position such as the vicinity of the left lamp 9B on the board as a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect, but even in this case, the group notice effect is also provided. It may not be used in.

Further, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are located at positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group advance notice effect (for example, the character advances in the group advance notice effect). However, since it is not used in the group notice production, its grandchildren's table is not prepared. The stick controller lamp 9J is lit to encourage an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A in an operation effect (effect shown in FIG. 133 (c91) described later), and the trigger button lamp 9K is a PUSH effect (FIG. 94 (described later)). Since the lamp is lit to encourage the operation of pressing the push button 31B in the effect shown in a19), the player can operate the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B if the lamp is lit in the group notice effect. This is because the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group notice production in order to avoid such inconvenience. The stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions such as near the left panel lamp 9B as positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect. However, it may not be used in the group notice production.

The features of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used for the grandchild table in the group notice production are summarized below. Specifically, the number of high-luminance lighting points is larger in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 controls lighting at equal intervals at 100 msec, while W2 controls lighting at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and for W3, 10 msec with respect to the frame left lamp 9L. While lighting control is performed at short intervals, lighting control is performed at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the lighting pattern, the brightness data is specified so that W1 is lit with high brightness while moving the lighting location according to the traveling direction of the group notice, while W2 is lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. Luminance data is specified so that the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice for W3. There is. Regarding the first luminance data, the luminance data is specified so that all the lamps are turned off or turned on at low luminance in W1, whereas the W2 and W3 are made to emit light at high luminance at the predetermined lighting points. Luminance data is specified. On the other hand, regarding the final luminance data, the luminance data is specified so that the W3 turns off all the lamps or turns on the lamps with low luminance for both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the luminance data loop, the luminance data is specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in W1 and W3, whereas the luminance data is specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in W2. W1 and W3 are specified for the 10-minute luminance data for defect countermeasures, whereas W2 is not specified.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec. Further, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified. Further, in W1, the first luminance data, which is a combination of the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance, and the first luminance data for each hour. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance is composed of the second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "R" for all the lamps included in the frame lamp, and "G" and "G" and " "0" indicating that the light is turned off is specified in "B". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 95 (a22) and 152 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low brightness. It will be like. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on. In this embodiment, in order to make the effect effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "1" indicating low brightness is defined in "R", and "G" and "B" are specified. "0" is specified to indicate that the light is off, but for example, when each lamp is mainly lit in green, "1" is specified to indicate low brightness in "G", and "R" and "B" are specified. It suffices if "0" indicating extinguishing is specified in, and when each lamp lights mainly in blue, "1" indicating low brightness is specified in "B" and extinguished in "R" and "G". It suffices if "0" indicating is specified.

Further, in W1, as indicated by the dotted arrow, the lamps that are lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamp are at equal intervals of 100 msec from T1-2 to T1-10. Luminance data is specified to move with. Here, the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 corresponds to the part where the character appears in the group notice, and the brightness data is displayed so that the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character advances. It is stipulated. The left frame lamp is initially turned off or turned on at low brightness, and gradually increases as the location of the lamp that lights at high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified so that the lamp lights up with luminance. On the other hand, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8, which were initially lit with high brightness, are turned off or turned on with low brightness as the portion of the lamp that is lit with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified in. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 and 152 to 154, which will be described later, the frame lamp is also from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character appears from the right end of the screen and progresses in the group notice. The position where it lights up with high brightness changes toward the left side.

Further, in W1, the data including data for turning on one frame lamp with high brightness and turning off another frame lamp adjacent to the one frame lamp is included, and the brightness is such that the portion of the lamp that is turned on in stages moves. The data is specified. As a result, in W1, the location of the lamp that lights up with high brightness can be moved according to the direction in which the character travels.

Further, in W1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the frame lamps are sparsely high in brightness according to the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamps when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

Here, if the data for this 10 minutes is not provided, the lamp lighting control is performed again from T1-1 when the lighting control is performed using W1 and the lamp does not shift to W2 due to some abnormality. Even though the character of the group notice has already appeared and is progressing, as shown by the dotted arrow, it is high again from the vicinity of the frame right lamp 9R5-9R8 from T1-2 to T1-10. The part of the lamp that lights up with brightness will move, giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, in this embodiment, since the data for 10 minutes is provided in T1-11, even if the lighting control is performed using W1 and the lighting is not transferred to W2 due to some abnormality, the data is set in 10 minutes. Since the frame lamp can be turned on in a light emitting mode suitable for the grandchild table W2, it is possible to prevent a feeling of strangeness. Then, if the abnormality is resolved in these 10 minutes, the player can continue the game without any particular discomfort.

In W1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

Further, the luminance data for 10 minutes for defect countermeasures specified in W1 is the luminance data in which adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location deviates from the state of the previous T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is stored for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. It is stipulated. Further, in W2, the first luminance data, which is a combination of the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance, and the first luminance data for each hour. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance is composed of the second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W2, one frame lamp is lit with high brightness, and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamp contains brightness data and is sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W2, high-luminance data (for example, “A”) is sparsely defined so as to be lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98, 99, 155, and 156, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the frame lamp is set according to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. Will be sparsely lit with high brightness. Further, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher brightness than W1.

Since the W2 is not provided with the luminance data for defect countermeasures unlike the W1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10. Here, even if the lighting control of the lamp is performed again from T2-1 when the lighting control is performed using W2 and the lamp does not shift to W3 due to some abnormality, the frame lamp is sparsely high. Since the mode of lighting with brightness is merely repeated, the player does not feel any discomfort.

Further, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all of the data referred to for each time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10, but the time for creating each data. Also, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which is very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of this embodiment, by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10 to perform lighting control, only one set of data that is repeatedly referred to can be created. The time efficiency can be improved. The reason why the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using one set of data in the second display period in the group notice effect is that the second display period in the group notice effect is larger than the first display period and the third display period. Since the second display period is long and the second display period is a time zone in which the screen is filled with a plurality of characters and the plurality of characters proceed as a group, the lighting corresponding to such an effect is lit. This is because it is sufficient to repeat the same lighting as the embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is transmitted to the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. It is stipulated. After that, RGB data is specified over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec for the frame left lamp, and continues over T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrow, the lamps that were lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 gradually turn off or are gradually turned off from T3-2 to T3-30. Increase the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness so that they turn on at brightness. Further, for T3-7 to T3-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the luminance data is specified at intervals of 80 msec, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances in the group notice. For ~ 9L12, the brightness data is specified so that the brightness is changed from high brightness to low brightness or low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 100, 101, 157, and 158, which will be described later, the frame lamp also changes from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned off or the position where the light is turned on at low brightness is changed.

Further, in W3, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low brightness at the time of transition to T3-30. Further, in W3, similarly to W1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is performed.

In W3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. It is expressed as "RRRR". Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. It should be noted that the monochromatic LED has less filters that block light than the full-color LED, so that the spectrum is strongly emitted. Therefore, the monochromatic LED has a smaller luminance data corresponding to the higher luminance than the full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 66A, in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In Y1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 95 (a22) and 152 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the accessory lamp 9A is set according to the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that the lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In Y1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In Y2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98, 99, 155, and 156, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are arranged in a group in the group notice effect. The lamp 9A will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in Y2 as in Y1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 66 (c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in Y3, similarly to Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the accessory lamp 9A is lit at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next production is started.

In Y3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for left lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a left lamp in a group warning luminance data table. As described above, the panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. 67, the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are sequentially "corresponded to". It is expressed as "WWWWWW". Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the left panel lamp 9B, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In L1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 95 (a22) and 152 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the panel left lamp 9B is set according to the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that the lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In L1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the left panel lamp 9B over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In L2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98, 99, 155, and 156, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the left side of the board is adjusted to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. The lamp 9B will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in L2 as in L1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 67 (c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in L3, similarly to L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the panel left lamp 9B is lit with low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next production is performed.

In L3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red (in this example). The LEDs are three colors (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented by hexadecimal numbers "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the on-board lamp 9C, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In U1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 95 (a22) and 152 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the on-board lamp 9C is set according to the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next second display period is entered. The brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In U1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the on-board lamp 9C over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In U2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98, 99, 155, and 156, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are grouped on the board in the group notice effect. The lamp 9C will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the U2 is not provided with the luminance data for troubleshooting as in the U1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in U3, similarly to U1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next production is started.

In U3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

In any of U1, U2, and U3, only the data of "0" is specified for the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, which are monochromatic. That is, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are not used in the group notice production.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is from "0" to "0". Brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number of "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the V attacker lamp 9F, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 69A, in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In A1, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 95 (a22) and 152 (b43) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are turned off at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect. Or it comes to light at low brightness. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in A1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, each lamp has sparsely high brightness according to the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of each lamp when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

In A1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Has been done.

In A2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98, 99, 155, and 156, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the attacker lamps match the appearance of the characters forming a group in the group notice effect. The 9E, the electric Chu lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in the A2 as in the A1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 69 (c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in A3, as in A1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F when shifting to the next production. The brightness data is specified so that the lamp 9F is turned off or turned on at low brightness.

In A3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Parent table in reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 70, in the parent table in the reach line brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the reach line effect is defined.

Unlike the group notice effect, the reach line effect is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special figure or the decorative symbol will be the display result that the big hit symbol stops, and it is a game that the reach is reached. It is a production that suggests (or informs) the person. In the reach line effect, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 93 and 140 to 143, which will be described later, a streak of light (also referred to as a reach line) appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a flash of light. , The reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (left and right direction) so as to connect the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table in the reach line luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec so as to match the reach line effect.

(Child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 71, in the child table in the reach line luminance data table, the time of the reach line effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (luminance data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the period during which the reach line effect is executed, the period during which the flash occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 90 (a8), (a9) and 140 (a8), (a9) described later) is a frame. A grandchild table of W11 for the lamp, Y11 for the accessory lamp 9A, L11 for the left panel lamp 9B, U11 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Of the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which the reach line occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 91 and 141 described later), the frame lamp is W12, the accessory lamp 9A is Y12, and the left panel lamp. A grandchild table of L12 is provided for each of 9B. Since the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used during the period when the reach line is generated, the grandchild table is not prepared.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (shown in FIGS. 92 (a13) to 93 (b17) and FIGS. 142 (a13) to 143 (b17) described later). During the production period), a grandchild table of W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the accessory lamp 9A, L13 for the board left lamp 9B, U13 for the board lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Of the period during which the reach line effect is executed, during the period when the reach line disappears (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 93 (a18) and 143 (b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14 and the accessory lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the left board lamp 9B, U14 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 71, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, the frame left in any of the period in which the flash occurs, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward, and the period in which the reach line disappears. Six types of brightness data tables are provided: a lamp 9L, a frame right lamp 9R, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the luminance data table referred to in the reach line effect, in the luminance data table referred to during the period when the reach line is generated, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. Four types of luminance data tables are provided.

As described above, in the reach line effect, the luminance data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group advance notice effect or a smaller number of lamps than the group advance notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line production is a production that suggests to the player that it has reached reach, and is not a production that arouses the player's expectation by suggesting a big hit like the group notice production. For this reason, the reach line effect does not perform elaborate lighting control such as providing different luminance data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually as in the group notice effect. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together. Furthermore, since the reach line effect has a shorter execution time than the group advance notice effect, it is elaborate to provide different luminance data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and control each lamp individually as in the group advance notice effect. Rather than performing lighting control, common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a8) and 140 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high luminance at the timing when the flash occurs. ..

As shown in FIG. 72B, in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141 described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

As shown in FIG. 72 (c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 142, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

As shown in FIG. 72 (d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, the luminance data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a18) and 143 (b18) described later, the frame lamp is turned off as the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73A, in the grandchild table Y11, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a8) and 140 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned on with high luminance at the timing when the flash is generated. ing.

As shown in FIG. 73B, in the grandchild table Y12, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 73 (c), in the grandchild table Y13, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T13-1 to T13-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 142, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 73 (d), in the grandchild table Y14, the luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a18) and 143 (b18) described later, the accessory lamp 9A is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the grandchild table L11, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a8) and 140 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are turned on with high luminance at the timing when the flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the grandchild table L12, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 74 (c), in the grandchild table L13, the luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 142, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 74 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a18) and 143 (b18) described later, the left panel lamp 9B is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the grandchild table U11, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a8) and 140 (b8) described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, among the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are used. Luminance data is specified so that the lamp lights up with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the grandchild table U13, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 142, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified as such.

As shown in FIG. 75 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a18) and 143 (b18) described later, the on-board lamp 9C is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". "To" F "represents the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the grandchild table A11, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a8) and 140 (b8) described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are bright so as to light up with high brightness. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the grandchild table A13, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T13 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 142, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated. There is.

As shown in FIG. 76 (d), in the grandchild table A14, the luminance data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a18) and 143 (b18) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Parent table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 77, in the parent table in the background warning brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the background notice effect is defined.

The background notice effect is different from the group advance notice effect, and is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special figure or the decorative pattern will be the display result that the big hit symbol stops, and is a specific character (for example, jam). Chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, the background of the starry sky).

In the parent table in the background notice luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 5500 msec so as to match the background notice effect.

(Child table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 78, in the child table in the background advance notice brightness data table, the time of the background notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W21, the accessory lamp 9A is Y21, the board left lamp 9B is L21, the board lamp 9C is U21, and the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table of A21 is provided respectively.

During the 100 msec period during which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W22, the accessory lamp 9A is Y22, the board left lamp 9B is L22, the board lamp 9C is U22, and the attacker lamp 9E is A22. Each grandchild table is provided.

In the final 600,000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W23, the accessory lamp 9A is Y23, the board left lamp 9B is L23, the board lamp 9C is U23, and the attacker lamp 9E is A23. Each grandchild table is provided.

As shown in FIG. 78, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the background notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the accessory lamp 9A are used in any of the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600,000 msec. , A board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp are provided with six types of brightness data tables.

As described above, in the background advance notice effect, the luminance data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group advance notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 79 (c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the grandchild table Y21, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the grandchild table Y22, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 80 (c), in the grandchild Tave Y23, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the grandchild table L21, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the grandchild table L22, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the grandchild table L23, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the background warning brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the grandchild table U21, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the grandchild table U22, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the grandchild table U23, the luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". "To" F "represents the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F over T21-1 to T21-2 at intervals of 50 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is increased over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 83 (c), in the grandchild Tave A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is repeated at 240 msec and 230 msec over T23-1 to T23-6. Luminance data is specified for.

(Brightness data table when all lights are on)
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining an example of the brightness data table at the time of full lighting. As shown in FIGS. 84A to 84H, in the full lighting brightness data table, the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, High-brightness brightness data (the maximum value "F" in this example) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the electric chew lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K. There is.

(Brightness data table during PUSH production)
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining an example of the luminance data table at the time of PUSH effect. The PUSH effect is an effect that encourages an operation of pressing the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 94 (a19) described later.

FIG. 85A shows the luminance data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, luminance data is specified for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J at the time of the PUSH effect is the same color as the lighting color at which the frame lamp or the like is lit in the group notice effect (red in this example).

FIG. 85B shows the luminance data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. In T41, luminance data is specified for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The lighting color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH effect is the same color as the lighting color at which the frame lamp or the like is lit in the group notice effect (red in this example).

(Child table in the group notice luminance data table related to the modified example)
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice luminance data table according to the modified example. As shown in FIG. 86, in the child table in the group notice luminance data table according to the modification, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone. (Also called a luminance data table) is specified.

For example, in the period (2000 msec) until the middle of the first display period in the period in which the group notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W101, the accessory lamp 9A is Y101, the left panel lamp 9B is L101, and the on-board lamp. A grandchild table of U101 is provided for 9C and A101 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modified example.

During the period (2790 msec) during the rest of the first display period, the second display period, and the middle of the third display period (2790 msec) during the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W102 is used for the frame lamp and Y102 is used for the accessory lamp 9A. , L102 for the left board lamp 9B, U102 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modified example.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period of the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W103 is used for the frame lamp, Y103 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L103 is used for the left side lamp 9B, and U103 is used for the onboard lamp 9C. , And a grandchild table of A103 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modified example.

As described above, in the group advance notice brightness data table according to the modification, the control of the game effect lamp 9 is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period in the first brightness data table, and during the first display period. The control of the game effect lamp 9 ends, and in the second brightness data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the first display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 continues even during the second display period. Then, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period in the third brightness data table.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table related to modified example)
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table according to the modified example. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is specified for each lamp over T101-1 to T101-10 at equal intervals of 20 msec, and the last time T101-11. In, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is specified for each lamp from T102-1 to T102-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. In W102, one frame lamp is lit with high brightness, and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamp contains brightness data and is sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W102, high-luminance data (for example, “A”) is sparsely defined so as to be lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. As a result, in the group notice effect, the frame lamps are sparsely turned on with high brightness according to the appearance of the characters advancing in a group in the group notice effect. Further, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 87 (c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp over T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified over T103-7 to T103-38 at short intervals of 2 msec for the frame left lamp, and continues over T103-7 to T103-38 at long intervals of 14 msec for the frame right lamp. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps that were lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned off with low brightness. Or increase the number of lamps that light up at low brightness. Further, for T103-7 to T103-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the luminance data is specified at intervals of 14 msec, whereas in the group notice, the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances. For ~ 9L12, the brightness data is specified so that the brightness is changed from high brightness to low brightness or low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. As a result, the position where the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness is changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left end of the screen in the group notice.

Further, in W103, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low luminance at the time of transition to T103-30. Further, in W103, similarly to W101, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is performed.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 173. In this embodiment, an effect mode will be described when any of the variation patterns of the main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which the pseudo variation is performed twice is selected. Further, in the figure, how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks is shown by hatching.

(Direction mode in stage A)
The production mode in the stage A will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 110.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image in which Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is flying is displayed as a character appearing in Stage A. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the character "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 88 (a3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a4), when the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the character "x3" indicating that the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 89 (a5). The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (a6), when "3" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a7), a decorative pattern for producing a reach line is displayed, which informs that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 90 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 70 to 76. In the state shown in FIG. 90 (a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 92 (a14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 92 (a15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 92, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 93 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen further shrinks, the reach line in the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (a18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 93 (a18), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 94 (a19) when the 6-person group notice is executed, and FIG. 103 when the background notice is executed. The effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 104 (a111), and when the lamp advance notice is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 104 (a111).

As mentioned above, the 6-person group notice is a production that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and 6 characters dressed as maids are grouped. It is a production that progresses as a maid. The background notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or the decorative figure becomes a predetermined jackpot pattern, and a specific character (for example, a character such as a protagonist, a rare character, etc.) is specified. This is an effect that is displayed together with the background (for example, the background of the starry sky). The lamp notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special drawing or the decorative drawing becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A). Is a production that lights up and blinks. In the lamp notice, any one of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, or a plurality of lamps may be turned on or blinking, or a lamp provided other than the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked. It may blink.

In stage A, a group notice (for example, a 6-person group notice or a boingo group notice) is executed after the reach line effect of the previous fluctuation. For example, when the 6-person group notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 94 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 85. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or blinking. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and the “PUSH! An effect occurs that erases the character image of "!". Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B could be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is completed by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the 6-person group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a21), the screen display of the image display device 5 once returns to the normal background image display, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a22), the notice of the 6-person group starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a23), the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), appears as the first (first) character in the first display period. The state shown in FIG. 95 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 58 (a), and while the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, has not yet been displayed, the maid A has not been displayed yet. It represents the first situation in which a part (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

During the execution of the 6-person group notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 63 to 69. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves. In addition, the meeting where the group notice production (6 people group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo notice described later) was executed, images other than the image related to the group notice production (for example, the background image and the image related to the SP reach first half notice production etc. ), The brightness is reduced. The brightness of the other images lowered during the group notice production gradually returns to the original brightness in the third display period. On the other hand, for the player, the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, the active display area 5A, and the like. The display of information on games that are of high importance regarding the outcome and advantage of the game is given a high priority so that the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed.

During the group notice effect, the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 60, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first display period is started. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume in the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a24), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. The state shown in FIG. 95 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 58 (b), and while the entire maid A initially displayed has not yet been displayed, a part of the maid A is partially displayed. While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) that was displayed more than the first situation and was displayed second was not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a25), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 96 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second appearing character skips the first appearing character. As shown in FIG. 96 (a27), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a28), the character continues to advance, and eventually the second appearing character running at the top (top) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 97 (a29), the second appearing character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 97 (a30), the second appearing character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a31), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the frame lamps are sparsely turned on with high brightness according to the appearance of the characters traveling in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 98 (a32) to 99 (a36), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 100 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed together with other characters. No new character will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the frame lamp is also turned off or low from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned on by the brightness will be changed. As shown in FIG. 100 (a37), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once turned on with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 100 (a38), as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen, the frame lamp starts to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (a38), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 100 (a39), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 101 (a40) and 101 (a41), the number of game effect lamps 9 to be turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 101 (a42), the group notice effect ends when the last character disappears.

Here, with reference to FIG. 102, a comparative example of the 6-person group notice and the 6-person group notice according to this embodiment are compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 102 (a201), as in this embodiment shown in FIG. 95 (a23), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed, but the maid A is concerned. This is the first situation in which a part of (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

After that, in this embodiment shown in FIG. 95 (a24), the entire maid A initially displayed is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed in the second situation. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 102 (a202), the maid A continues to run without the appearance of the second maid B, and the entire maid A is displayed. Then, in the comparative example shown in FIG. 102 (a203), the second maid B finally appears after the first maid A runs through the left side of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not look like a group notice effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 101, an animation in which a plurality of characters appear one after another without a gap and run through is displayed, so that the plurality of characters proceed as a group. By doing so, it is possible to create a powerful production. Further, since the number of characters overtaking other characters is smaller than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character, it is possible to prevent the group advance notice effect from becoming too complicated. The number of characters overtaking other characters may be larger than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

When the background notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 103 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 85.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (a103), as a background notice effect, a specific character (in this example, Maid B (Jam-chan)) is displayed together with a specific background (in this example, the background of the starry sky). It is displayed on the screen of 5. Further, during the effect of the background notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 69. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice.

When the lamp advance notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 104 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 85.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (a113), the lamp advance notice is executed, and a predetermined lamp (for example, the accessory lamp 9A) included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on or blinks. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the lamp notice.

After the third display period of the group notice is completed as shown in FIG. 101 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 103 (a103) and the lamp notice shown in FIG. 104 (a113) are finished, FIGS. 105 to 105 As shown in FIG. 109, the symbol feed effect is executed. The symbol feed effect is whether or not the decorative symbol being variable-displayed (in this embodiment, the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C) is stopped in the decorative symbol in the reach mode, and the decorative symbol to be stopped. It is a production that encourages the player whether or not the design is a decorative design that constitutes a jackpot design. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on the predetermined luminance data table. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 105 (a43), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern that is the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 105 (a44) to 106 (a48), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 107 (a49) to 108 (a54), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and FIGS. 109 (a55) to (a57) show. As shown, finally, the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 109 (a57), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the symbol feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 110 (a58) and 110 (a59), the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" which has become the reach mode by the effect effect called whiteout. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" which is the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (a59), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

(Direction mode in the first half of SP reach)
The production mode in the first half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 119.

As shown in FIGS. 111 (a61) and 111 (a62), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 111 (a63), the title of SP reach is displayed. In this embodiment, as the SP reach effect, a maid character such as Yumemu-chan catches the Baku Chu, so the title "Catch the Baku Chu!" Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 112 (c1), when the production of the first half of the SP reach is executed, an image in which Maid A (Yumemu-chan) stands up is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (c2), an image in which the opponent's character (enemy character), Baku Chu, is surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c3) to 113 (c5), an animation is displayed in which the maid A chases the escaping explosive chew.

As shown in FIG. 113 (c6), after the animation in which the maid A jumps on the explosion chew is displayed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c11) at the time of loss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 9). However, at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. In the case of shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the transition is made to the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c31).

When the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c11). In the production shown in FIG. 114 (c11), an image in which the maid A is depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is a lost symbol "4". "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (c12), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the loss mode is changed by the effect called blackout. As shown in FIG. 114 (c13), the image gradually becomes black, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are in the lost mode are completely invisible. ..

After that, as shown in FIGS. 115 (c14) and 115 (c15), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that has been switched on the back side is gradually increased. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (c16), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c21). In the production shown in FIG. 116 (c21), an image in which the maid A catches the explosion chew and gives a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. 3 "stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 116 (c22), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 116 (c23). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 117 (c24) and 117 (c25), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 118 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c31). In the production shown in FIG. 119 (c31), an image in which the maid A is depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is a lost symbol "4". "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (c32), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are in the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. Up to this point, the production is the same as when the SP reach is lost in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 114 (c11) and 114 (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 119 (c33), in the case of shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect of dropping the movable body 32, which did not occur when the loss occurs in the first half of the SP reach, is executed.

Then, in the case of shifting to the latter half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23) after the effect of dropping the movable body 32 is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. In the case of shifting to reach (in the case of fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the transition is made to the effect shown in FIG. 127 (c71). In this way, the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit includes a fluctuation pattern that shifts to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach by pretending that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach. As a result, from the player's point of view, once the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the player will shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach by relief, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Direction mode in the latter half of SP reach)
The production mode in the latter half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 126.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c33) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c41), the character image, the background image, and the like are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (c42), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by the blackout is gradually increased, the effect image of the latter half of the SP reach that has been switched on the back side appears. You will be able to see it. During the production of the latter half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 120 (c42), when the production of the latter half of the SP reach is executed, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) stand up and declare war on Baku Chu. The image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 120 (c43) to 121 (c45), an animation is displayed in which the maid A and the maid B chase after the escaping explosion chew.

As shown in FIG. 120 (c46), after the animation in which the maid A and the maid B jump on the explosion chew is displayed, the time of loss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 12) is shown in FIG. 122 (c51). When shifting to the production and at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 23), shifting to the production shown in FIG. 124 (c61) and shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26). Shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 127 (c71).

When the loss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c51). In the production shown in FIG. 124 (c51), an image in which Maid A and Maid B are depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and a lost symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the center. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (c52), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. As shown in FIG. 122 (c53), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 123 (c54) and 123 (c55), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that has been switched on the back side is gradually increased. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (c56), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c61). In the production shown in FIG. 124 (c61), an image in which Maid A and Maid B catch the explosion chew and give a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "3" stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 124 (c62), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 124 (c63). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 125 (c64) and 125 (c65), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, and the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 126 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in the final reach)
The production mode in the final reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137.

When shifting to the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 127 (c71). When shifting to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly turns black as shown in FIG. 127 (c71), and a cross-shaped light effect is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 127 (c72). Will be done. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (c73), the effect of notifying the start of the final reach is executed, the face image of the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is displayed on the entire screen, and "Go! Character image is displayed. The effect display of the light as shown in FIG. 127 (c72) is the effect of the blackout shown in FIG. 127 (c71) and the effect of displaying the face image of the hero shown in FIG. 127 (c73). It is intentionally inserted in between. As a result, the effect shown in FIG. 127 (c72) can inform the player that the final reach will be achieved in an easy-to-understand manner.

After that, the production during the final reach is executed. During the production of the latter half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 128 (c74), an image in which the maid A gives a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 128 (c75) to 128 (c78), an image of one character is displayed at each of a plurality of timings, and an image of the entire sentence is displayed as shown in FIG. 128 (c79). By doing so, the theme of the production performed in the final reach is shown. In this example, it is shown as "all set".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 130 (c80) to 131 (c85), an animation in which the character appearing in the final reach effect is introduced is displayed at each of a plurality of timings. For example, in this example, maid F, maid E, maid D, maid C, maid B, maid A, etc. appear in order from the supporting characters, and the main character has a high priority near the final (or the latter half). A character appears. In addition, characters with high priority such as the main character may appear in order. That is, it is preferable that a high-priority character such as a hero appears at the beginning (or the first half) or near the final (or the latter half) so as to stand out more than a low-priority character such as a supporting character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (c86), when the final reach production is executed, an image is displayed in which the six characters who appeared in the notice of the six-person group are standing up and declaring war on Baku Chu. Will be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 132 (c87) to 133 (c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase after the escaping Baku Chu.

As shown in FIG. 133 (c90), after an animation in which six characters drive the explosion chew is displayed, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 133 (c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit during which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the characters "Close !!" are displayed. The image is displayed.

After the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 133 (c91), when the stick controller 31A is lost (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 15), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. (In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26) shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 135 (c111).

When the loss is confirmed in the final reach, the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 133 (c91), and then the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 134 (c101). In the effect shown in FIG. 134 (c101), an image in which the six characters are depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is a lost symbol. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (c102), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. As shown in FIG. 134 (c103), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, although not shown, if the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the normal background that has been switched on the back side will appear. Become. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 133 (c91) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 135 (c111). In the production shown in FIG. 135 (c111), an image in which six characters are catching the explosion chew is displayed, and a big hit symbol "3" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle. Stop.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 135 (c112), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 135 (c113). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 136 (c114) and 136 (c115), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 137 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in stage B)
The production mode in the stage B will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 158.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Baku Chu is displayed as a character appearing in stage B. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b2), when the character "x2" indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 138 (b3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b4), when the character "x3" indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 139 (b5). The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (b6), when "3" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b7), a decorative pattern for producing a reach line is displayed, which informs that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 140 (b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 70 to 76. The luminance data table shown in FIGS. 70 to 76 is the same as the luminance data table used in the reach line effect of the stage A. In the state shown in FIG. 140 (b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and a reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode. The reach line appearing in the stage B may be the same as the reach line appearing in the stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, or the like, for example.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141 (b12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 142 (b14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 142 (b15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 142, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further reduced, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further reduced in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (b18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 143 (b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 144 to 148. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on the predetermined luminance data table. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 144 (b19), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern that is the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 144 (b20) to 145 (b24), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 146 (b25) to 147 (b30), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and FIGS. 148 (b31) to (b33) show. As shown, finally, the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 148 (b33), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the symbol feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 149 (b34) and (b35), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative symbol of "3" which is the reach mode is gradually whitened by the whiteout. Eventually, the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" which became the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (b36), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has become white due to whiteout is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

As shown in FIGS. 150 (b37) and 150 (b38), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 150 (b39), the title of SP reach (“Catch Baku Chu!”) Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

In stage B, a group notice (for example, a bomb chew notice or a boingo group notice) is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach of the post-variation is being displayed. For example, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach is displayed, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 151 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 85. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or blinking. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B could be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is completed by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the explosion chew group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to the display of the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b43), the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. In the state shown in FIG. 152 (b44), while the entire character displayed first (first) is not yet displayed, a part of the character displayed first (in this example, a part of the face). ) Is displayed, indicating the first situation.

During the execution of the Baku Chu Mondai notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 63 to 69. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 152 to 154, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves.

During the group notice effect, the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 60, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first display period is started. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume in the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b45), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. In the state shown in FIG. 152 (b45), while the entire character displayed first is not yet displayed, a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation, and the second character is displayed. It represents the second situation in which the entire character displayed in is not yet displayed, while a part of the second displayed character (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 153 (b46) to (b48), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. The display area on the screen used in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of "Catch Baku Chu!" In the SP first half title notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b49), the character continues to advance, and eventually the first displayed character running at the top reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 154 (b50), the first displayed character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 154 (b51), the first displayed character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 155 (b52), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the frame lamps are sparsely turned on with high brightness in accordance with the appearance of the characters traveling in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 155 (b52) to 156 (b57), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As the characters run from the left side to the right side of the screen as a group, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display of "Catch the Baku Chu!". ..

As shown in FIG. 157 (b58), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. No new character will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the frame lamp is also turned off or low from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned on by the brightness will be changed. As shown in FIG. 157 (b58), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once turned on with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b59), the frame lamp starts to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (b59), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 157 (b60), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 157, as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen, the title display of "Catch Baku Chu!" Reappears step by step. At this time, if the SP first half title notice lottery is won, the SP first half title notice is given by changing the display mode (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch Baku Chu!". .. For example, as shown in FIG. 150 (b39), before the Baku Chu group notice is executed, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display in the first half of the SP reach are white, but FIG. 156 (b56). After that, when the character image in the group notice is displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the title is displayed, the title display becomes difficult to see or disappears. While the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group notice, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display change to red, and as shown in FIGS. 157 (b59) and (b60), the character in the group notice. Disappears to the left edge of the screen, and the red title display gradually appears and becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 158 (b61) and (b62), the number of game effect lamps 9 to be turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 158 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group notice effect ends. After that, the process shifts to the production of the first half of the SP reach shown in FIG. 112 (c1).

(Boingo group notice)
The production mode of the Boingo group notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 168.

In the above-mentioned 6-person group notice and Baku Chu group notice, a plurality of characters proceed as a group from the right end to the left end of the screen. As described above, the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice were the effects of the character advancing in the X-axis direction in the XY plane shown in FIG. 51. On the other hand, in the Boingo group notice, the character (Boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the Boingo group notice is a 3D effect in which the character progresses in the three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 159 to 164 are diagrams for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in the stage A. Even when the Boingo group is executed in the stage B, it is the same as the effect mode shown in FIGS. 159 to 164. Further, although not shown, the Boingo group notice effect also has a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, as in the case of the 6-person group notice effect and the Baku Chu group notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 159 (d1), the boingo group notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

While the Boingo group notice is being executed, for example, based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 63 to 69, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect. For example, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light up with high brightness, and then the place of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. In addition, the frame lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness according to how the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through.

As shown in FIG. 159 (d2), a pre-stage image by a light effect is displayed as a pre-stage effect before a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is the group appearance point where the character group appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (d3), the first character appears from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the previous image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 160 (d4) and 160 (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually progresses toward the screen. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 160 (d6), as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible by the first character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 161 (d7) to 161 (d9), the characters form a group and proceed from the depth side to the front side of the screen, so that the entire screen is covered by the characters. As shown in FIGS. 162 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and progresses from the depth side to the front side of the screen.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 163 (d13) and 163 (d14), as the last character advances from the depth side to the front side of the screen, it covers most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 163 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed from one end to the other end of the screen over a range, and the entire screen is covered by the last character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 164 (d16) and 164 (d17), the original background image is displayed as the last character disappears from the screen, and as shown in 153 (d18), when the last character disappears. The group notice production ends.

FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the details of the Boingo group notice. FIGS. 165 (A) to 165 (F) correspond to FIGS. 159 (d3) to 160 (d6), 161 (d8), and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 165 (A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 165 (B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible to be visually recognized by the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 165 (E) and 165 (F), even if the succeeding character image is placed at the position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized, so that the succeeding character image must be placed. May be good.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, a comparative example of the Boingo group notice is compared with the Boingo group notice according to this embodiment. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 166, a character (boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the previous image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 159 (d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the discomfort that the character suddenly appears large, it is necessary to create an animation so that the character is displayed small and gradually enlarged as shown in FIGS. 166 and 167. ..

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in FIGS. 166 (d101) to 167 (d105) is displayed until the character can be displayed in the size shown in FIG. 159 (d3) as shown in FIG. 167 (d106). You have to go through it, which takes extra time to produce, and you have to create an image for animation. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 (d2) and 159 (d3), the pre-stage image by the light effect is displayed as the pre-stage effect before the character appears. By displaying the first character from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image by the effect, the character can be displayed from the beginning with a certain size (the size shown in FIG. 159 (d3) and FIG. 167 (d106)). It can be displayed.

(Modified example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice according to the modified example is executed. The example shown in FIG. 168 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 164. For example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 159 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 168 (d103). As such, the normal background image may be switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. In this way, the group notice effect may be executed during the execution of the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the Boingo group notice may give a notice of a big hit by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 158. Further, instead of covering the entire screen by enlarging the last character, the background image used for the group notice effect may be switched to the next effect by an animation wound like a scroll.

(Dog herd notice)
A mode of producing the dog herd notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171.

In this embodiment, the 6-person group notice, the bomb chew notice, and the boingo group notice are exemplified as the group notice effect, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is referred to as a dog group notice as shown in FIGS. 169 to 171. It may be the one that executes the group notice effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 169 (e1), the first character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 169 (e2), a plurality of dog characters appear one after another, and FIG. 169 (e3). The screen area may be covered with a group of characters as shown in.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 170 (e4) to 170 (e6), the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 169 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group notice effect in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 170 (e6). As such, the normal background image is switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the subsequent production of the first half of the SP reach is displayed.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the dog group notice may give a notice of a big hit by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 158.

As shown in FIG. 171, when the 6-person notice and the dog group notice are compared, the distance between the first displayed character and the last displayed character in the dog group notice (the length between them on the X-axis). S) X2 is shorter than the distance (length between the two on the X-axis) X1 between the character displayed first and the character displayed last in the 6-person group notice. Further, since the execution time is the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group notice is slower than the speed V1 at which the character advances in the six-person group notice. Further, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group notice is larger than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six-person group notice. In addition, the dog group notice production has a higher expectation (reliability) of a big hit than the 6-person group notice production, and the dog group notice production has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the 6-person group notice production.

(Execution of group notice production during reach line production)
With reference to FIGS. 172 and 173, an effect mode when the group notice effect is executed during the reach line will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (f1), in a state where the reach line effect is executed, the group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 172 (f2) to (f4), and then FIGS. 173 (f5) and (f6). ) May be executed.

[Main configurations and effects]
The technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(1-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. People group notice production) and
A process of executing a blessing effect executing means (for example, a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a blessing effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that displays an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. ) And, with
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect (for example, after the 6-person group notice effect shown in FIGS. 95 to 101 is executed, the fanfare effect shown in FIGS. 116 to 118 is executed).
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9), the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the first predetermined period (for example, the period of T1 + T2 shown in FIG. 61) until it is suggested that the display is the result of the loss display, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 62).
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variable pattern of the variable numbers 20, 23, 26), the variable display is displayed after the variable display is started. In the second predetermined period (for example, T3 + T4 period, T5 + T6 period, T7 + T8 period) until it is suggested that the specific display result is the first half of the second predetermined period, the first display period. Starts (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 62).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, the feeling of exhilaration may diminish with the passage of time until the result of the variable display is finalized, but in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, it is in the latter half of the time of the variable display. By executing the group notice effect, it is possible to maintain the feeling of exhilaration and evoke it again. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, the fanfare effect, which is a blessing effect, is executed. After that, even if the feeling of exhilaration diminishes with the passage of time, the feeling of exhilaration can be maintained or evoked again by the blessing effect.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. That is, the specific display result is a display result for controlling the gaming state to an advantageous state even if it is derived. In this embodiment, a big hit occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, and the lighting corresponding to the big hit occurs. The combination of embodiments is the specific display result. Further, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit is specified. It will be the display result. Further, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol (for example, a big hit such as "3,3,3" or "7,7,7". A big hit occurs when the game is stopped as a combination of symbols), and the display of the specific special symbol is the specific display result.

The "loss display result" is a display result different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the loss display result. That is, the loss display result is a display result in which the gaming state is not controlled to the advantageous state even if it is derived. In this embodiment, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the loss occurs. The combination of the corresponding lighting modes results in a loss display result. Further, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. The combination will be the result of the loss display. Further, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 becomes a specific predetermined symbol (for example, a combination of lost symbols such as "3, 2, 3") and stops. Occasionally, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the display of the predetermined symbol becomes a loss display result.

The "advantageous state" is a state advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the value-adding rate for games (for example, the payout rate of a game ball) is 1 or more or more than 1 by being controlled. In this embodiment, as an advantageous state, a big hit gaming state controlled when each of the normal big hits 1 and 2 and the probabilistic big hits 1 to 9 occurs is exemplified. The advantageous state may be a small hit gaming state controlled when a small hit occurs, or may be a probabilistic change state or a time saving state.

The "new display of the character" may be a character of the same type as the character initially displayed in the group notice effect, or may be a character of a different type from the character initially displayed in the group notice effect. good.

The "blessing effect" is an effect of displaying an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, and is controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display having become a specific display result. It is also a production that displays an image that congratulates you. "Blessing" includes suggesting or notifying the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, "blessing" improves the player's expectation for the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to the advantageous state. Including letting you do it. For example, in the blessing effect, the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, and the special figure 2 variable display unit of the special figure LED board 9020. The combination of lighting modes in 9022 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, or the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol ( It includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that the game has become a big hit symbol) or that the player is controlled to the big hit game state.

"The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" means that the group notice effect is executed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1, and then the blessing is performed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. Including that the production is performed. In addition, "the blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" indicates that the display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is the specific display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. When the group notice effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that suggests or gives a notice before the display result is started, the group notice effect is executed, and then the variable display based on the hold memory of the 1 is started and the 1 Includes the execution of a blessing effect within a variable display based on the hold memory of.

The "first predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result, and in this embodiment, FIGS. 61 and 62. It is exemplified by the period of T1 + T2 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a loss display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the loss. , The combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit in the special drawing 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special drawing LED board 9020 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, and the decorative symbol display area of the image display device 5. This includes stopping the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R as a specific predetermined symbol (missing symbol combination). Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the loss display result because the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operation means such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and by operating the operation means by the player. You may.

The "second predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and in this embodiment, FIGS. 61 and 62. It is exemplified by the period of T3 + T4, the period of T5 + T6, and the period of T7 + T8 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit. , The combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, and variable display is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. Includes that the decorative symbol that is being displayed becomes a specific special symbol (big hit symbol combination) and stops. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result by the operation of the movable body 32 at the specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operation means such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and by operating the operation means by the player. You may.

(1-2) The second display period is a period longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is a longer period than the first display period. (For example, each display period shown in FIG. 60).

From this, the group notice effect can be made powerful by setting the second display period in which the characters appear one after another in the group notice effect to be the longest period. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from the first appearance of the character to the first departure of the character as the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the suddenly executed group notice effect from becoming full. Can be done.

(1-3) The character displayed first in the first display period is a character having a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yume-chan, who is the main character).

As a result, the character that first appears in the group notice production is a character with a high priority like the main character, which is familiar to the player, but after that, a character that appears less frequently than the main character in other productions. By appearing in the group notice production, it is possible to surprise the player about the group notice production and make the player feel that it is a rare production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "high-priority character" includes the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the character having the highest priority among the characters other than the main character, and is executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 more than other characters. Includes characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the production to be performed.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the character is displayed in the group effect. Is first started at a timing close to half of the second predetermined period in the first half of the second predetermined period (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 62).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group notice effect is executed in the vicinity of the latter half of the first half. So, the afterglow of the group notice production can be extended to the later side as much as possible.

(1-5) As for the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. After pretending to be, the variable display result includes a relief pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 23 and 26) that becomes the specific display result.
Also in the relief pattern, in the second predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is the first. 1 The display period begins (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 62).

As a result, even in the case of a relief pattern in which the display result of the variable display is a hit display result after the display result of the variable display is pretended to be a lost display result, the fanfare effect which is a blessing effect is executed. , The group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time to give an uplifting feeling, and even if the uplifting feeling diminishes with the passage of time, the blessing effect keeps the uplifting feeling or evokes it again. Can be done.

(1-6) A pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. With the pattern suggested to be (for example, the variation pattern of the main variation numbers 20, 23, 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result or the specific display result. A common display is made (eg, the example shown in FIGS. 88-137).

As a result, for example, a common effect is executed for the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 and the variation pattern of the variation number 20 until the display result is finalized, and the display result of the variation pattern of the variation number 12 and the variation pattern of the variation number 23. The common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed, and the common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed between the variation pattern of the variation number 15 and the variation pattern of the variation number 26. Therefore, the common effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the player is in the middle of the game.

It should be noted that the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. (For example, the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 20, 23, and 26) are different from each other until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result or the specific display result. May be done.

As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the effects different from each other are being executed.

(1-7) A notice effect for notifying that the execution period of the group effect and the display result of the variable display, which is different from the group notice, will be the specific display result (for example, the SP first half title notice effect). May overlap with the execution period of
The notice effect ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 152 to 158).

As a result, even if the group notice effect is executed while the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the SP first half title advance notice effect can be shown to the player.

(1-8) While the advance notice effect is being executed, the group effect is executed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 152 to 158).

As a result, when the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the player can pay attention to the execution of the group advance notice effect. It should be noted that the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect and the group advance notice effect do not start at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the notice effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 31). , The group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice).

As a result, other notice effects with a lower expectation of a big hit than the group notice effect are not displayed on the front layer having a higher priority than the group notice effect, so that the big hit is suitable for the player. Can be suggested. As described above, in this embodiment, the production having a high expectation of a big hit is not covered with the production having a low expectation on the front side.

(1-12) During the execution of the group effect, the brightness is reduced in both the background display and the display in the advance notice effect, while the display of information related to the game (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory). The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the number, the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when the group notice effect is executed, the brightness of the image related to the background display and other notice effects (for example, the image related to the SP first half title notice effect having a lower expectation than the group notice effect) is lowered, while the game is played. It is important for the player as much as possible because the display of information about the game, which is highly important for the player regarding the victory or defeat of the game and the advantage, is given a high priority, and the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed. Information can be shown.

(2-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 95).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, it is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is a group notice production and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

In the "first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed", as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the entire character initially displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is still present. While not displayed, a situation in which a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the game machine frame 3 displays an image. In the display area visible to the player in the state of covering the screen of the device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed, while the character is at the edge of the display area visible to the player. Includes situations where part of is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the first appearing character is completely invisible, but a part of the first appearing character is visible.

"The second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed" is shown in FIG. 58 (b). As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 as compared with the first situation. And while the entire second displayed character has not yet been displayed, a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or FIG. 95 (b). As shown in the above, in the display area visible to the player when the game machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed. At the edge of the display area visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and the entire character displayed second is not yet displayed, while the character is visible to the player. Includes a situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears after the first appearing character before the first appearing character is completely visible.

(2-2) In the group effect, the first displayed character and the second displayed character have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, since the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y axis, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the display of characters in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56).

This has the effect of making each character appear to be a plurality of characters, so that it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character will appear.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output during the display of the character displayed first in the group effect, but by the time the display of the character displayed second is started. Finish (for example, the example shown in FIG. 95).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output and the first character appears, so that the player can be notified that the group notice effect has been executed, while the second character By the end of the start sound by the time it appears, it is possible to suitably provide a group notice effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but it ends by the time the second character appears. ..

(2-5) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and a character in which a part of the whole body does not fit in the display area of the screen. Part includes a character that fits and is displayed in the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 54).

As a result, more characters can appear in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a first character (for example, maid A) and a second character (for example, maid B) whose type is different from that of the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character displayed in which the whole body fits in the display area of the screen and a part of the whole body are displayed in the display area of the screen. The other part of the whole body is displayed in a mixed manner with the first character displayed in the display area of the screen without being fitted (for example, the example shown in FIG. 54).

This makes it possible to give the illusion that more types of characters are appearing in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-7) A shield (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) covers a part of the screen, and the character displayed first in the group effect is displayed at the position where the shield covers. Is started, and then the display of the second displayed character is started.
Even when the screen is visually recognized with the shield covered, the first situation changes to the second situation during the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 58).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen actually viewed by the player, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, so there is a question as to whether or not it is a group notice production, and only one person appears. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that it may be.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is visually recognized from the side toward the screen and the shield, it is possible to visually recognize the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 58).

As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the side and visually recognizes the edge of the screen, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice effect, so that the group notice effect is produced. It is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is the case and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear.

(2-9) At the design stage, a display relating to the group effect is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shield on a screen of a predetermined size, and further, the predetermined size of the screen (for example, for example). A display relating to the group effect is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that it can be applied to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches).

As a result, even when the design of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suddenly changed so as to use a size larger than a predetermined size, the created group notice effect data can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect are a low importance character (for example, maids C to F) having a low importance in the content of the gaming machine, and the low importance character. Including high-importance characters (for example, maids A and B) that are highly important in the contents of the gaming machine.
The high-severity character has a lower proportion than the low-severity character in that the face does not fit in the display area of the screen and the part other than the face of the whole body fits in the display area of the screen and is displayed (for example, the figure). Example shown in 54).

As a result, a character with high importance such as the main character can easily recognize the face in the group notice production as compared with a character with low importance such as a supporting character, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(3-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the group notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing the effect is provided.
The effect executed by the effect executing means includes a group effect (for example, a group notice effect shown in FIGS. 95 to 101) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
The group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, in the group notice production, the largest number of characters appear in all the productions, so that the player can be made aware that the variable display that can be expected to be a big hit is performed.

"The group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is 1 among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects executed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect of pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, 1 The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is executed during the big hit game state and the subsequent probable change state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect having the largest number of characters displayed on one screen includes the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is described in all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the largest is included in the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects performed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect at the time of pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, the effect is concerned. The effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens is the largest is included in the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is executed during the big hit game state and the subsequent probable change state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the largest is the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

(3-2) An effect in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group effect, and a specific effect in which a plurality of characters are displayed (for example, an effect of the latter half of the SP reach or an effect of the final reach) is executed.

As a result, various effects can be executed, and among them, the largest number of characters can appear in the group notice effect.

It should be noted that the specific effect may be an effect in which the number of displayed character types is larger than that of the group notice effect.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed in the second display period of the group effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the specific effect.

As a result, it is possible to show the player a powerful effect in the second display period, which is the longest period among the group notice effects.

The number of character types displayed in the second display period of the group notice effect may be larger than the number of character types displayed in the specific effect.

(4-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
In the group production,
An auxiliary display is made to show that the character is in progress,
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character has priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character is used. When the display of the second character overlaps with the display of the second character, the display of the second character has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 55).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, while it is possible to show the player a more dynamic group notice effect by displaying the auxiliary display on the character, the auxiliary display does not hinder the visibility of other characters, so that more characters can be displayed. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display indicating that the character is progressing, and for example, an image display emphasizing that the character is progressing as shown in FIG. 55 (as shown in FIG. 55). For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke (an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces of passage of a character (for example, an image display of a character's footprint), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example). , An image display representing the aura of the character). The "auxiliary display" may be an image display performed in the vicinity of the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The layer displayed on the screen is different between the display of the character in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the image of sand smoke is layer 1 and the character. The image of is placed in the layers after layer 2).

As a result, the character image and the auxiliary display can be preferably shown to the player in the group notice effect.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10).
The moving image data corresponding to the group effect includes the first character data (for example, the moving image data of the character C of the layer 9) and the second character data (for example, the character C of the layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. Video data) including
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values relating to the movement speed of the character, while the animation parameter values relating to the movement of the character are the same.

As a result, even when the movement speed of the character is changed, the work process related to the design of the group notice effect can be reduced by sharing the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character.

(4-4) In the group effect, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 53).

As a result, since a plurality of characters do not operate in the same position at the same position, the group notice effect can be preferably shown to the player.

(5-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, the display of the newly displayed character (for example, the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (for example, FIG. 96, FIG. Example shown in 97).

The "newly displayed character" may be the character that appeared second in the group notice effect as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, or the character that appeared third or later in the group notice effect. You may. Considering that the group notice effect is an effect in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, the character that appears second in the group notice effect is displayed first as the "newly displayed character". It is preferable that the character that appears immediately after the second appearance overtakes the character that is displayed first because of a sense of dynamism and presence.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the character that appears second is overtaken by the character that appears first and disappears at the top as it is, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character that overtakes another character.
The number of overtaken characters is either greater or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaken character.

As a result, the group notice effect can be prevented from becoming too complicated, and the group notice effect with a lively feeling can be shown to the player. Can be shown to.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character and the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is more than the outline of the other character. Is also displayed thick (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

As a result, it is possible to show the player how the character overtakes another character in an easy-to-understand manner.

(6-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. People group notice production) and
Execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the push effect) for displaying the suggestion image (for example, the image showing the push button 31B, the meter image, and the character image of "PUSH !!") suggesting the execution of the group effect. Means (for example, a process of executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120) are provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
The display of the suggestion image ends by the start of the first display period in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 94).

The "suggestion image" may be any image as long as it suggests the execution of the group notice effect, or may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operation means as shown in FIG. 94. , It may be an effect image such as a light or a pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of the group notice effect, or it may be a clock image in a timer effect that measures the time until the group notice effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image (for example, a character image of "group") suggesting the execution of the group notice effect. In the timer effect, the time until the group notice effect is executed by the clock image is timed, and when the timed time reaches a predetermined time, a character image suggesting the execution of the group notice effect (character of "group"). The image) may be displayed.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestion image (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) is finished, the display of the character is first started in the first display period (for example,). Example shown in FIG. 94).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image prompting the player to operate the operating means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a character image of "PUSH !!").
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operating means is operated during the display of the suggested image ends by the time when the display of the character first starts in the first display period (for example, FIG. 94). Example shown in).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-4) When the operating means is operated while the suggestion image is being displayed, any one of a plurality of effects including the group effect (for example, 6-person group notice, background notice, lamp notice) is executed. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 94, 103, 104).

As a result, a plurality of effects are executed with the operation by the player as a turning point, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(7-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. It is equipped with a crowd notice production and a dog group notice production shown in FIGS. 169 to 171).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
The group production includes a first group production (for example, a 6-person group notice production) and a second group production (for example, a dog group notice production).
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect proceed at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1), respectively.
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect each proceed at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2).
The first speed is faster than the second speed,
The first group effect is configured so that the linear distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than that of the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 171). ..

As shown in FIG. 171, the "straight line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is displayed first in the group notice effect such as the 6-person group notice effect and the dog group notice effect. It is a linear distance (X-axis distance) from the end of the character to the end of the character displayed last. This linear distance is set to time T, where T is the time from the display of the first character to the display of the last character from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and V is the speed of each character. It can be calculated by multiplying the velocity V (T × V).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to preferably show the player two types of group notice effects.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effect (for example, X1 / V1) is the same as or substantially the same as the execution time of the second group effect (for example, X2 / V2) (for example, in FIG. 171). Example shown).

This makes it possible to execute two types of group notice effects using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) When the second group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the first group effect is executed.
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, for the dog group notice effect, which has a lower execution probability than the 6-person group notice and has a high expectation, the speed of the character is made slower than the 6-person group notice, so that, for example, the player shoots the character of the dog group notice effect. You can increase the chances of doing it.

(7-4) The degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect are dense (for example, the degree of density D2) is the degree to which the plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect are dense (for example, dense). Greater than degree D1).

As a result, the characters are arranged at an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and the moving distance of the characters in the group notice effect, so that it is possible to provide a group notice effect suitable for the player.

(7-5) In the second group effect, a plurality of characters located at the tail end are arranged from the lower part to the upper part of the screen.
On the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the display corresponding to the subsequent effect is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 170).

As a result, it is possible to switch to an image for the next production and show it to the player at the opportunity of the group notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48, Boingo shown in FIGS. 159 to 168) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With group notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, the display of the character is started from a specific position so that the character advances from the back side to the front side on the screen.
At the timing related to the first start of the display of the character at the specific position, the front-stage display (for example, the display of the front-stage image by a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see is performed (for example, the display of the front-stage image by a light effect). , The example shown in FIG. 159).

The "previous stage display" may be any display as long as it makes the display of the character difficult to see, and is a display that hides a specific position where the character appears (for example, display of an effect image such as light or a pattern). Etc.). "Difficult to see" means that the player cannot completely see the specific position, the player can see the specific position but the specific position is difficult to see, and the player can see the specific position but the character can see the character from the specific position. This includes a state in which the appearance cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the player can visually recognize the specific position and the appearance of the character from the specific position can be visually recognized, but the visual recognition is difficult.

The "timing related to the first start of the character display at a specific position" is the same timing as the first start of the character display at the specific position, or the timing when the character display first starts at the specific position. A timing within a predetermined period before and after (this predetermined period is a period during which the player thinks that the display of the character first starts at a specific position) is included.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, it is possible to display the character from the beginning with a certain size, and suddenly a large character is displayed. Does not cause the player.

(8-2) In the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to proceed from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen.
The enlarged display makes it difficult to visually recognize the character at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 165).

This makes it possible to give a visual effect as if a plurality of characters appear one after another from a position with a certain depth.

(8-3) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end (example shown in FIG. 163). ..

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) The background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent effect in conjunction with the movement of the character displayed last in the group effect (for example, FIG. 163). , Example shown in FIG. 164).

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end.
On the back side of the character displayed last, other characters in the group effect are not displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 165).

As a result, even if the succeeding character image is placed in the position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is not necessary to place the succeeding character image, and a plurality of characters appear one after another from a position having a depth. It is possible to give a visual effect as if it appeared.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. People group notice production) and
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. A specific volume higher than the predetermined volume is set, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. The production sound is output.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at a specific volume even during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group notice production at a specific volume even before the second display period. It can improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled so that the sound output means raises or lowers the volume, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but raising or lowering the volume is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. It may be something that raises or lowers the volume.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the effect sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the effect sound rises to a specific volume starts to decrease in the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the effect sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 60).

As a result, the sound output in the group notice effect is performed in a shorter time for the fade-in, and the fade-out is performed in a longer time than the fade-in, so that the sound of the group notice effect can be suitably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 48) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 95 to 101. People group notice production) and
It is equipped with a plurality of lighting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 such as a frame lamp).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 95 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 98 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 100 (a37) to 101 (a42). Period shown),
The luminance data table composed of the plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means is the first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period (for example, the frame lamp shown in FIG. 65 (a)). The grandchild table W1), the second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 65B), and the third luminance corresponding to the third display period. A data table (for example, a grandchild table W3 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 65 (c)) is included.
Each of the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table is a first luminance data in which data for lighting the lighting means with low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance are combined. The combination of the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness and the data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness is composed of the second brightness data different from the first brightness data (for example, FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 65),
The second luminance data table is set to light more of the lighting means with higher luminance than the first luminance data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is a frame lamp grandchild table W1). High brightness (“0” to “F”) data is stored in more lamps).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. Further, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp with higher brightness than the first brightness data table, so that the first display period In, it is possible to express a weak footstep when multiple characters appear, and in the second display period, it is possible to express a strong footstep when multiple characters appear one after another, and a more suitable group notice effect is given to the player. Can be provided.

"Data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness" are a plurality of lighting units included in each lighting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1). It is lighting data (lighting element) for each time in WWW in the upper lamp 9C. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), the data (100) of the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) in T1-1. be. As the RGB data, the data corresponding to the extinguishing is "000", the data corresponding to the low-luminance lighting is "100", and the data corresponding to the high-luminance lighting is "F00".

The "brightness data" is lighting data for each time in each lighting means (for example, a frame lamp, a board lamp 9C), and is "data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness" or "high brightness of the lighting means". It is a collection of "data for lighting in" for each time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), it is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in T1-1.

The luminance data table is a collection of "luminance data" in a predetermined period (for example, the lighting time specified by the parent table or the child table). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), T1-1 to T1- It is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in 11.

(10-2) The first luminance data table has a longer luminance data switching interval than the second luminance data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 64, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals. , The grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that the character is running faster than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are evenly spaced, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are not evenly spaced (for example, shown in FIG. 64). As described above, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at 50-80 msec intervals).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that a plurality of characters are running out of step with each other as compared with the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-1) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for moving a lighting portion in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 64, the grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp is a group. Lights up with high brightness according to the direction of travel of the notice),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data that does not move the lighting portion in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 64, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is high over a plurality of locations. Lights up with brightness).

As a result, it is possible to express how characters appear in the first display period and a plurality of characters appear one after another in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-2) In the first luminance data table, the lighting means located in the vicinity of the character is lit with high brightness according to the progress position of the character first displayed in the group effect, and the character is lit. It includes luminance data for turning off or lighting the lighting means located in the vicinity of a non-reachable portion with low luminance (for example, an example of the grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 65 (a)).

As a result, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or lights up with low brightness at the place where it has not reached yet, so the lamp is turned on. It can be used to express how the leading character progresses. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-3) In the first brightness data table, the lighting means is turned on with high brightness, and then, as the character first displayed in the group effect progresses, the lighting means is turned off or turned on with low brightness. It includes luminance data (for example, an example of a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 65 (a)).

As a result, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or lights up with low brightness at places that have not yet reached or have already passed. , It is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-4) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance and then lighting the lighting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect with high luminance. (For example, an example of the grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 65 (a)),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data in which the lighting means is lit with high luminance and then the lighting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect is not lit with high luminance (for example, FIG. 65). Example of grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in (b)).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off at the place where it has not reached yet or the place where it has already passed. Or, since it lights up at low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-5) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness and turning off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 65 (a)). Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness and lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 65B). Example).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off at the place where it has not reached yet or the place where it has already passed. Or, since it lights up at low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-1) The third luminance data table includes luminance data for increasing the number of the lighting means to be turned off according to the progress of the character in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 64, a grandchild for a frame lamp). The table W3 is turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice).

As a result, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or turned on with low brightness as the character progresses, so that it is possible to express how the character progresses by using the turning off or on of the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-3) In the third luminance data table, the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect is the character in the group effect. It is shorter than the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction opposite to the traveling direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 64, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec. The switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

Thereby, in the third display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappears. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, the control of the lighting means starts at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the control of the lighting means ends during the first display period.
In the second luminance data table, the control of the lighting means is started during the first display period, the control of the lighting means is continued even during the second display period, and the lighting is performed during the third display period. The control of the means is finished,
In the third luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts during the third display period (for example, an example of the group notice luminance data table shown in FIG. 86).

As a result, the lamp lights up from the middle of the first display period with high brightness as in the second display period, so the state in which the character progresses from before the second display period can be expressed with excitement by lighting the lamp. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-2) In the second luminance data table, the control period of the lighting means is set longer than that of the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table.
The first luminance data table is set to have a longer control period of the lighting means than the third luminance data table (for example, an example of the group advance luminance data table shown in FIG. 86).

As a result, it is possible to express the appearance of a plurality of characters one after another in the first display period with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-1) The luminance data first defined in the first luminance data table is the luminance data for turning off or lighting the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect with low luminance (for example, FIG. 64). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, the first luminance data is turned off or turned on at low luminance for all the lamps).

This is more preferable because the lamp lights up when the group notice effect is executed after a break is made without mixing with the lighting of the lamp that was performed before the group notice effect was executed. A group notice production can be provided.

(14-2) The luminance data first defined in each of the second luminance data table and the third luminance data table is the luminance that does not turn off or turn on the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect with low luminance. It is data (for example, as shown in FIG. 64, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the lamp lights up with high luminance for the first luminance data).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group notice effect is executed, the player emphasizes the flow of the effect and performs the group notice effect without separating by turning off all the lamps and turning on the low brightness. Can be shown to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-3) The luminance data finally defined in the third luminance data table is the luminance data for turning off or lighting the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect with low luminance (for example, FIG. 64). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the last luminance data is turned off or turned on at low luminance for all the lamps).

As a result, when the group notice effect ends, all the lamps are turned off or turned on with low brightness, so that the player can recognize that the group notice effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 64, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified as such).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed so as not to repeat the luminance data having the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 64, the same luminance data is used in the frame lamp grandchild table W3). Luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, for the luminance data in the third display period, which is set for a longer period than the second display period, the degree of freedom in design is increased by defining the luminance data as it is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 64, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified),
In the first luminance data table, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is specified last, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is not specified last (for example,). As shown in FIG. 64, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 defines the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 does not specify the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time can be reduced. On the other hand, for the luminance data in the first display period, the luminance data is specified as it is, but instead, the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures is specified, so that the defect countermeasures are taken during the 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-2) The luminance data for troubleshooting is the luminance data in which the longest time is defined among the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table, and is from the beginning of the first luminance data table. It is luminance data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 64, 10-minute data for defect countermeasures is specified in the frame lamp grandchild table W1).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting control of the lamp from the beginning of the first luminance data table by the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, so that a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

(16-3) The luminance data for defect countermeasures is luminance data for regularly lighting adjacent lighting means in order (for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), for defect countermeasures for 10 minutes. The luminance data of is the luminance data in which adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location is deviated from the previous state).

As a result, even if a problem occurs, the adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location deviates from the previous state, so that it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated, which is preferable. A group notice production can be provided.

(17-1) The lighting means are a single-color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) and a multi-color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9) that are lit in a plurality of colors. Including ~ 9C13)
The luminance data for lighting the monochromatic lighting means with a specific high luminance includes a specific value (for example, “6”) as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance lighting, and includes the specific value (for example, “6”).
The luminance data for lighting the plurality of color lighting means with the specific high luminance includes a value larger than the specific value (for example, “8” to “F”) as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance lighting.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light between the lamps that are lit with high brightness by making the values corresponding to the lighting of high brightness appropriate according to the type of light emitting means, and it is possible to produce a suitable group notice. Can be provided.

(17-2) The single-color lighting means includes a first-color lighting means that lights in the first color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) and a second-color lighting means that lights in the second color (for example, the left side of the board). Including lamps 9B1 to 9B5)
Regardless of the luminance data for lighting any of the first color lighting means and the second color lighting means with the specific high luminance, the specific value (for example, "for example," 6 ”) is included.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light even among the lamps that are lit in the same single color, and it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(18-1) Both the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data different from each other for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 65). Grandchild table for frame lamp shown in),
The luminance data table used in the advance notice effect, which is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, is the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the game machine. It contains common luminance data for each (eg, grandchild table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 72).

As a result, in the group notice effect, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, a more detailed lighting mode can be realized, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. can.

(19-1) The group effect interrupts during the execution of a notice effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result. May be executed in
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light according to the luminance data table corresponding to the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 172 and 173).
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the notice effect, or includes the lighting means used in the notice effect and the lighting means not used in the notice effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 71, in the reach line effect, there is a period in which the on-board lamp and the attacker lamp, which are always used in the group notice effect, are not used).

As a result, even when the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, since the common lamp is lit, it is possible to realize the effect by lighting without discomfort, and provide a suitable group notice effect. be able to. For example, if the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, the lighting of the lamp in the group notice effect and the lighting of the lamp in the other notice effect are mixed, but the lamp that lights in both of them is assumed to be. If they are different from each other, many lamps are complicatedly turned on, which makes the appearance unattractive and may give the player a sense of discomfort. In this respect, if the lighting of the lamp in the group notice effect and the lighting of the lamp in other notice effects are made common, it is possible to prevent a large number of lamps from being complicatedly turned on.

(19-2) The advance notice effect ends during the execution of the group effect, and a predetermined effect (for example, a symbol feed effect) different from the advance notice effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 172 and 173). Example),
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the lighting means used in the predetermined effect and the lighting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 172 and 173).

As a result, even if the group is switched to another effect during the group notice effect, the common lamp is lit, so that the effect of lighting can be realized without discomfort, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(19-3) The group effect is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group notice lottery shown in FIG. 31).

As a result, it is determined whether or not the group notice effect is executed by lottery regardless of other effects, so that the processing burden related to the execution of the group notice effect can be reduced, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific lighting means can be lit when controlled to the advantageous state, and does not light when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is a round of a big hit gaming state in which a V prize can be generated. Lights up to notify you that you are inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 64).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, which causes the player to misunderstand whether the lamp is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, stick controller lamp 9J, trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is effective by lighting (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J is turned on to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A and is triggered. The button lamp 9K lights up to prompt the operation of pressing the push button 31B),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 64).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, which makes the player misunderstand whether the operation of the operating means is being promoted. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described.

(About the display period of the group notice production)
In this embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

As a result, by making the character that first appeared in the first display period look longer, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect suggesting a big hit has been executed.

(About the execution timing of the group notice production)
In this embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, the group notice effect is executed in the latter half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%, but this is not limited to this. No. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of variable display is a lost display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the latter half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Further, in this embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%. Not limited to. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the latter half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group notice production)
In this embodiment, the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) appears as the first (first) character in the first display period, but the main character Maid A appears most often in the second display period. (Yumemu-chan) may be.

As a result, the character of the main character can be frequently shown to the player in the longest second display period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the character displayed first in the first display period may be a premier character.

As a result, the premier character can be shown to the player first in the first first display period, and the group notice effect can be made to have an impact. If the character displayed first in the first display period is a premier character, the jackpot may be fixed. Further, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including a rainbow (seven colors).

The premier character may be the character with the lowest appearance rate among all the states and effects, or may be a character that does not appear except for the group notice effect. Further, the premier character may be a character that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher by appearing than other characters.

(About lighting control in group notice production)
In this embodiment, the luminance data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 65, but the luminance data may be defined as follows. That is, it includes the first specific brightness data that combines the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness and the data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness, and the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness. There is a second specific brightness data that does not include data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness, the first specific lighting data is not used in the first brightness data table, and the second brightness data table is the second. Specific lighting data may be used.

By doing so, since the data to be lit with high brightness is not specified in the first display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are approaching by illuminating the lamp with low brightness. Since the data that lights up with high brightness is defined in the display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are progressing one after another.

Further, the third luminance data table may include luminance data for turning off all the lighting means that were lit in the second luminance data table.

By doing so, it is possible to express how the character progresses and disappears in the third display period by turning off the lamp.

Further, the lighting means includes a specific lighting means at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
A specific member capable of transmitting light is arranged on the front side of the specific lighting means.
When the specific lighting means is lit, the color visually recognized through the specific member becomes a specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table may not include the luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means.

By doing so, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, and the lamp is lit through the transparent specific member located on the front side of the lamp. It is possible to prevent the color to be visually recognized from interfering with the color of the group notice effect by becoming a specific color that is not used in the group notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(About the video data of the group notice production)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, moving image data in which the character to be operated and the operation content (operation pattern) of the character are associated in advance is created at the design stage, and the moving image data is obtained. Was stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces the moving image data stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It was. However, the moving image of the group notice effect may be reproduced by a method different from the above.

For example, the data of the character to be operated and the data indicating the operation content (operation pattern) may be stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 obtains character data and operation patterns stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It may be the one that selects each of the indicated data, creates moving image data by combining both, and reproduces the created moving image data.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121, a plurality of data in which each of the character A, the character B, and the character C runs or walks is stored in the storage area 1, and an arbitrary plurality of data for which the character is not determined is determined. It suffices to store the moving image data showing a plurality of operation patterns related to the group advance notice effect in the storage area 2, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the character from the storage area 1 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached. The moving image data related to the group notice effect may be extracted from the storage area 2 and combined to create one group notice effect moving image data, and the created moving image data may be reproduced.

(When the group notice production and other notice production overlap)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 157 and 170, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of the other notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is in the other notice effect. An image that is larger than the display area of the image and that the display of the image in the group notice effect has priority over the display of the image in the other notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group notice effect is the image in the other advance notice effect). It was on the front side of the display layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect. May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Alternatively, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the other notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Further, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the group notice effect is displayed. The display may be prioritized over the display of the image in the other notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the other notice effect). When the display area of the image in the other advance notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group advance notice effect, for example, the advance notice image that the player pays attention to, such as an image suggesting a big hit, depends on the image in the group advance notice effect. Although hidden, images located around the preview image (for example, an image showing a flame, an aura, etc. surrounding the preview image) include those that can be visually recognized without being hidden by the image in the group preview effect.

(Example of time saving control that does not go through hit)
Next, an example of executing a time saving control that does not go through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) as a time saving state will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving symbol)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always shifts via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7A. It may be made to shift to the state). That is, as the time saving state, the time saving control may be executed without going through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.).

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of a lost symbol or a part of a small hit symbol.

(A3) Further, when the lottery process relating to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol is performed, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost symbol. Or a random number for performing other lottery such as a lottery random number of a big hit symbol, a lottery random number of a small hit symbol, a random number for determining a big hit lottery, and a lottery random number of a fall lottery, the lottery may be performed.

(A4) Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

(A5) Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the time-saving symbol is used for all the set values. Although the lottery probabilities are the same, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start port (first start). It may be at the time of winning a prize at the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving symbol is drawn. When a small hit symbol random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a fall lottery judgment value random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the fall lottery judgment value random number can be used as the winning value. , A lottery using a structure, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

(A8) In the case where the lottery of the time-saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number (time-saving number) of the time-saving state is determined by the presence or absence of passing through the time-saving region. Make sure it doesn't change.

(A9) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and the big hit symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

(A10) Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving is already in the state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings given may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Further, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

(A15) Further, the number of times the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed (time reduction end lottery) is executed, and the number of time reductions is set to the number of times until the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

(A16) Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

(A17) Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

(A18) Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, a high probability at the time of opening the game hall. It is a low-base state, and the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

(A20) Further, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated.

(A21) Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time saving control examples using time saving symbols)
As another time saving control using the time saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the special symbol is performed in the time-saving state. Based on the fact that the variable display result of the time saving symbol is displayed, the game control for further shifting from the time saving state to the same time saving state is not performed (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (time saving state). May not be controlled to switch the game state). Then, different effects may be produced when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol). In the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general lost symbol is displayed.) This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special symbol is the time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays the common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. A different symbol may be displayed as a display result in the reduced working hours state (for example, the decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the reduced working hours symbol in the normal state, but simply displays a lost symbol in the reduced working hours state, etc.). Do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, the display result of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state does not give the player a feeling of loss, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect suggesting whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol is a special symbol (time saving symbol) is executed, but in the time saving state, the decorative symbol is executed. It is also possible not to execute the effect suggesting whether or not the display result of is a special symbol (time saving symbol). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is displayed as a result of the effect in the time-saving state.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbol (the time for displaying the fixed surface result and then maintaining the display state) differs between the normal state and the time saving state. You may control it. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is produced in a time-saving state.

(B5) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. (Display effect, etc.), right-handed game is played in response to right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed) during the time-saving state, and variable display based on the hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. Until all is done. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B6) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until all the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B7) Left-handed notification is executed in the variable display (first variable display) executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is completed. You may. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit (small hit, big hit) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed is It may be different. As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B9) In the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends, a common effect is obtained when there is holding storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no holding storage information. It is possible to execute different effects after executing (For example, when there is hold storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the fourth hold storage information out of the four remaining hold storage, the third hold memory A common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed until the variable display based on the information, and a time saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved storage information. It may be possible). As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B10) The effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) stored based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed differs depending on the effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, the production changes according to the game state, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(B11) Confirmation display time of display result in variable display (second variable display) based on remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after the confirmed surface result is displayed. The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information is executed may be common. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period when the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed and the variable display is based on the remaining hold storage information. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period when the next variable display is started. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result) such as a hit symbol or a big hit symbol or a time-saving symbol (special display result). The ratio of the time-saving symbols (special display result) may be different depending on which of the common specific effects provided is executed. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period at which the next variable display is started. As a result, it is possible to suitably control the effect according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a hit symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is abundant, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control has a common variation pattern depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result), a time-saving symbol (special display result), or a lost symbol (predetermined display result). Is selectable, and even when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the same fluctuation pattern from the game control CPU 103, different effects are displayed in the variable display according to the type of the symbol specification command that specifies the display result. May be made feasible. As a result, the variation of the variable display effect is enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained may or may not be executed (for example, a plurality of types). Of the super reach productions in the above, when performing the production with the highest expectation, the special production is not executed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a hit (a display moved from the display position of the hold display to another display position, and is currently being executed). The expectation (ratio) that becomes the time saving symbol (special display result) is made different according to the production mode of the production) that displays the effect that can suggest the expectation of the hit corresponding to the variable display of. May be good. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B20) In the special effect that can be executed when the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, after performing the effect (such as the time-saving suggestion effect) that suggests that the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, the winning symbol (specification) is executed. It may be possible to execute an effect (such as a special jackpot whose game value is higher than that of a time-saving state) to notify the display result). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled to a time reduction state (special state) in which the number of time reductions (time reduction continuation period) differs according to the types of time reduction symbols (special display results) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the first). The 1st time reduction symbol: 50 times of time reduction, the 2nd time reduction symbol: 100 times of time reduction, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time reduction symbol is stopped depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect, etc.). You may execute effects with different number of time reductions (duration). As a result, depending on the type of production, the player's attention can be focused on the subsequent time reduction, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game is controlled to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. The transmitted command includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the effect control CPU 120 executes a plurality of types of commands including the special command. A look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information that is specified to execute the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information when received. You may want to limit the execution (do not execute at all, make it executable in rare cases, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect control according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information, the look-ahead for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information specified to execute the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot gaming state (specific game state) is executed. The execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. Then, as the look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of such a look-ahead notice effect, it may be possible to execute the effect of a common mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B24) The variable display based on the hold storage information for the look-ahead target is a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the display and the case, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B25) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute an effect having a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, hold when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red). Do not change the display color to red, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B26) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red, the color of the hold display is changed to red. Do not change, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(Example of time reduction control using the variable display count that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the loss variable display count)
Next, an example of time saving control using a variable display count (number of continuations of variable display that has been lost) that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in a normal state will be described. As shown below, in the time saving state (special state), the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached the special number (for example, 1000 times). May be feasible on condition. As the predetermined result, the time saving state (special state) may be executed on condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the loss display result reaches the special number of times.

(C1) A game based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a specific display result after the first variable display by the first special symbol and the second variable display by the second special symbol are performed. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the person, and the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is concerned. Based on the above, when the special condition that the number of executions (continuation) of the variable display resulting in the predetermined display result reaches the special number (for example, 1000 times) is satisfied, the normal state is changed to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to be transferred. Then, the numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times that the predetermined display result is obtained is continuously updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, so that the player can be easily rescued due to the time saving state. , It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time saving state.

(C2) The special condition is satisfied when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result is continuously displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times). You may do it. As a result, when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (probability change state, time saving state). As a result, the player can be suitably relieved when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be satisfied by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when it is no longer necessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition May be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when the player no longer needs to be rescued, such as when the player is in a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs substantially, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the backup is stored when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, so that it is suppressed from being disadvantageous to the amusement park side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times or more), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for a period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more). In the time saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state) and A different effect may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time is shortened in the second time saving state than in the first time saving state. It is possible to change the appearance of the production, such as, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment. It should be noted that the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state) without executing such an effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player is in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), and suppresses a decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process relating to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The third process for controlling the time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to hit the game ball into the first path (left side game area) and the second path (right side game area). In the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. Then, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), it is notified that the second path should be fired (for example, right-handed notification by a right-handed lamp or the like). You may do it. Further, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to a time saving state (special state) may be performed. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, by turning on the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the launch direction early (before the actual start of the time reduction fluctuation) when actually shifting to the time reduction state (special state). Will be.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. .. As a result, since the control to the advantageous state is prioritized over the control to the time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition, the result is not more advantageous for the player, and the player's hobby of the game is enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes a specific value based on the fact that the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, waiting for customers), it is controlled to a time saving state (special state), and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached). When changing the flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set) and controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). You may. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the control of shifting to the time saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines a variation pattern of a symbol determination time that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. You may do so. As a result, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process related to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied. The third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, fluctuation pattern) according to the case where the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value and the third numerical value in the special state. .. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, different gaming states can be suitably identified, which facilitates gaming control. Then, if the command is different according to the game state identified at that time, the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) can execute suitable effect control according to the game state.

(C14) In the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the specific display result (hit symbol) and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the end of the big hit game state (for example, the time is shortened). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the specific display result (hit symbol) and the special condition (variable display number of times). The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). The fluctuation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the special display result (time saving symbol), and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the special display result (time saving symbol), and the special condition (variable display number of times). The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In such a case, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 has predetermined information (predetermined information) based on the backed up and stored data when the power is turned on. It is possible to transmit a ram clear command at the time of cold start and a command for notifying the number of fluctuations displayed until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. A suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display was executed in a predetermined period after the power was turned on (so-called morning output is different, the background image is different, and an effect that suggests whether it is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuations is executed. (Easy, etc.) may be made feasible. It is possible to give the player a motivation to play the game in the morning, so that the operating rate of the game machine increases and the processing load does not increase.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command capable of specifying information related to the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 is capable of transmitting the effect control CPU 120. It may be possible to execute a special effect (such as an effect of suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. Then, as the specific information, the first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect) capable of specifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is a predetermined value (for example, 127) or less is specified. Information) and second specific information (such as a command that counts down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 127). May be good. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting the function to the player, and it is possible to suitably realize the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 is put into a time saving state (special state) when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display of the first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for time-saving state suggestion effect control) suggesting that it is controlled, and a second predetermined number of times (for example, for example) less than the first predetermined number of times before the variable display of the special number of times is executed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly losing the player by suggesting the function to the player on a regular basis.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. A different effect (such as a different effect when shifting to the time-saving state) is executed when the state is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the condition and when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. When the condition is controlled based on the condition, different effects are executed after being controlled to the time saving state (special state) (the effect after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the reduced working hours symbol, the case where the big hit occurs, or the case where the loss occurs.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration relating to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but is an enclosed type that encloses the gaming media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, depending on the player. If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative pattern display area, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp 10 General winning opening, 11 Main board, 12 Production control board, 13 Audio control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special figure LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start Mouth switch, 23 count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 50 4th symbol unit, 81, 82,83 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 104,124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can be controlled to a normal state and a special state that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state.
A game control means that can control the progress of the game,
An effect control means capable of controlling an effect based on control information transmitted from the game control means, and an effect control means.
Predetermined when the number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period that has never been controlled from the normal state to the advantageous state or the special state has reached a specific number of times. An update means that can update numerical data from the first value to the second value,
When the predetermined numerical value data is the second value, the adjusting means for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is given decreases, and
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value.
The adjusting means is a variable display in which the variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust so that it is longer than the variable display period,
Moreover,
It is equipped with a group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. A gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation.

Images